JP6692119B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting winning means provided on the game board, a win / loss lottery is performed to determine whether or not a hit state is to be generated, and a win / win lottery is performed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result of the above (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-27480 A

Further, as a starting winning means, an opening and closing type starting winning means is provided which allows a game ball to be entered only when a predetermined open lottery is won. For example, the starting winning means has a gaming ball. It is known to add intonation to the game by setting a state in which it is easy to enter and a state in which it is difficult to enter. However, the opening and closing start winning means is only opened and closed according to the result of the open lottery, and the behavior of the peripheral portion of the opening and closing start winning means is relatively monotonous .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance of a starting winning and further enhancing the interest. ..

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
Starting winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
Starting prize detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the starting winning means,
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a win / win lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, and a main control means for generating the special game state based on the result of the win / loss lot When,
A gaming machine comprising: a sub control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
The starting winning means includes a ball entrance for guiding a game ball moving in the game area to the outside of the game area, and an open position for guiding a game ball moving in the game area to the ball entrance , A first variable member that is displaceable substantially parallel to the game board between a closed position that restricts entry of a game ball moving in the game area into the entry port ;
A first position that can cover the front of the first variable member in the open position and a second position that can cover the front of the first variable member in the closed position; 2 variable members,
The first variable member is drive-controlled by the main control means,
The second variable member is drive-controlled by the sub-control unit,
In the case where the first variable member is in the open position and the second variable member is in the first position, the second variable member of the first variable member is closer to the closed position side than the surface of the second variable member. The side portion on the second position side is located on the closed position side ,
The front of the first variable member that is displaced from the closed position to the open position is covered by the second variable member that is displaced from the second position to the first position,
The front of the first variable member that is displaced from the open position to the closed position is covered by the second variable member that is displaced from the first position to the second position,
The first variable member presses the second variable member at the second position when the first variable member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and the second variable member is moved to the second variable member. Equipped with a pressing part that can be displaced to 1 position,
The second variable member includes a convex pressed portion that is pressed by the pressing portion when the first variable member is displaced from the closed position to the open position,
The pressing portion is configured to avoid interference with the second variable member when displacing the second variable member to the first position while keeping the first variable member in the closed position. It is characterized by being.

  According to the first aspect, it is possible to enhance the performance of the start winning and enhance the interest.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where the inner frame and the front frame set were opened. It is a front view showing a configuration of an inner frame, a game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame, a back pack unit, etc. were opened. It is a block diagram which shows the main electric constitutions of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process. It is a flow chart which shows hit / miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows a type determination process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st reach judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd reach judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display setting process. It is a flow chart which shows discriminating information setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning device control processing. It is a flow chart which shows reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payment control device. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for determination of a decorative design, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information storage processing. It is a flow chart which shows reservation processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit display processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a hold icon setting process. It is an explanatory view of a reservation icon pattern storage table. It is a flowchart which shows a pseudo holding icon setting process. It is a flow chart which shows pseudo blade opening control processing. It is a flow chart which shows pseudo feather production processing. It is a front view showing the visual recognition mode of a decorative design display device (holding display area). It is a front view of a starting winning unit, (a) shows a state where a pseudo blade member is in a standby position, (b) shows a state where the pseudo blade member is in a functional position. (A) is a front view of a base plate, (b) is a rear view of a front decoration part (cover unit). It is a perspective view showing a blade member, a pseudo blade member, and the like. It is a partial expanded sectional view of a starting winning unit. It is a perspective view which shows the blade member and pseudo blade member in another embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the blade member etc. in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the starting winning unit in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the starting winning unit of another embodiment, (a) is a front schematic diagram of a blade member and a base plate, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a base plate, (C) is a perspective view of a blade member. It is a perspective view for explaining a front decoration part etc. in another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern display device (holding display area) in another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern display device (holding display area) in another embodiment. It is a schematic cross section for explaining a payout passage (payout time adjusting means) in another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and one side portion of the outer frame 11 includes an inner frame as a game board mounting frame. The frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. Note that in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, the game members (such as nails and accessories) arranged on the surface of the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as the front frame are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate material, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. Each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is made of a material and is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame forming portion 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  Further, the right-side frame forming portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 protruding toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction thereof. The extension wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12 from the rear surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extension wall 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to project toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Further, a curtain curtain decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower frame forming portion 11b. Ribs 88 protruding upward are integrally formed on the inner surface of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with an opening / closing axis set vertically along the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 may be supported so as to be directly openable to the outer frame 11 instead of being supported by the inner frame 12.

  Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape, and covers almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided in the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are lower trays 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a ball removing lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") projecting to the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation portion of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60, which will be described later, as launching means, with a strength corresponding to the amount of turning operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, the firing of the game ball by the firing device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to perform the turning operation of the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball with the handle 18 held.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball receiving plate that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 described later while aligning them in a line. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via a lower plate communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16 described later.

  A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards or the like inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation. The rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

  Further, a ball removing button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removing button 123.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, there are provided an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 with built-in LEDs, and by pressing the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, a decorative pattern display device 42 or the like described later is displayed. In, the corresponding effect is performed or the effect content is changed.

  Further, a light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the game state and the like. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Further, error display lamps 104 that are turned on at the time of a predetermined error are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. It should be noted that a large number of small through holes are formed in a portion above the error display lamps 104 of the annular illumination portion 102 so as to correspond to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. ..

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately in front and back, but has a round shape as a whole and is assembled and then attached.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 at the rear side of the window hole 39 in a state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, a lower portion of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window 39, is provided with a launching rail 61 for guiding the launching device 60 and the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60. There is. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type launching device is adopted as the launching device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device for guiding the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by the drive of the built-in driving means (for example, solenoid). 63 are provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. On the game board 30, a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device as a variable display means. 43L, the second special display device 43R, the variation specifying lamp 40, and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various prize holes such as the general prize hole 31, the variable prize device 32, the start prize devices 33a and 33B, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to.

  In the present embodiment, if there is a ball to the first start winning device 33a, then 3 balls, if there is a ball to the second starting prize device 33b, then 2 balls. When there is a ball, 10 game balls are paid out, and when there is a ball into the variable winning device 32, 12 game balls are paid out. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 that does not enter the game ball but does not enter (is not discharged to the back surface side of the game board 30), the payout of the game ball is not performed. .. In addition, while the first starting winning device 33a, the general winning opening 31, and the through gate 34 are configured such that game balls moving in the game area can always enter or pass through, The 2 start winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change their state between an open state in which the game balls can enter and a closed state in which the game balls cannot enter.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and game balls that have not won various winning outlets such as the general winning outlet 31 will have this outlet 36 opened. It is discharged through the game area. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails (game nails) are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are arranged. ing.

  The variable display device unit 35 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround a decorative pattern display device 42 described later.

  A pair of left and right entrance ports 151 are provided on the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game ball entering the entrance port 151 is passed through the warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47. It is guided on the stage 153 formed below the decorative pattern display device 42. The game ball guided on the stage 153 rolls on the stage 153, falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends in the front and back formed in the center of the stage 153 to play the game ball. It may fall into the lead-out groove 154 that guides forward.

  At the lower position of the variable display device unit 35, a first starting winning device 33a having a starting winning opening through which game balls can always win. The lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is located immediately above the first starting prize-winning device 33a, and the game balls guided by the lead-out groove 154 enter the first starting prize-winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. It is configured to be a sphere. It should be noted that the first starting prize device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease with which the game balls enter the first starting prize device 33a.

  A second starting winning device 33b is arranged below the first starting winning device 33a. The second starting winning device 33b is provided with a pair of rotatably displaceable blade members 37 adjacent to the left and right sides of the starting winning opening of the second starting winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 of the second starting prize device 33b is in the closed position extending vertically, the tip end of the blade member 37 is adjacent to the first starting prize device 33a. As a result, there is no room for the game balls to pass between the second start prize device 33b and the first start prize device 33a, and the second start prize device 33b is closed when the game ball cannot enter the start prize hole. It is in a state. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 is changed to the open position that opens outward, the second start winning device 33b is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the starting winning opening.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, as the first start winning prize means and the first starting prize winning device 33a as the normal start moving prize means, the second starting winning prize means, and the opening-closing start winning prize means. The second starting winning device 33b is unitized and attached to the game board 30. Hereinafter, the one in which the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are unitized is referred to as a "starting winning unit 401".

  The variable winning device 32 is disposed below the starting winning unit 401. The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and in a jackpot state or the like, the game ball is in an open state in which a game ball can be won. Although illustration is omitted, the variable winning device 32 is for a special winning opening that opens to the rear of the game board 30, a big winning shutter that opens and closes the big winning opening, and a big winning opening for operating the big winning shutter. A solenoid and a count switch 223 for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening are provided, the special winning opening solenoid is driven and controlled, and the special winning shutter is opened and closed, whereby the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is provided. Is switched between a closed state and an open state.

  Through gates 34 are arranged at the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 35 in the game area. The through gate 34 is configured so that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described later in detail, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

  Further, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b, and the ordinary symbol display device 41 is also provided. At, a variable display is provided to teach the result of the entry support lottery. When the winning support lottery is won, the second starting winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, the first start winning prize device 33a and the second starting prize winning device 33b respectively have a first starting prize switch 224a and a second starting prize detecting means 224 as first starting prize detecting means for detecting a game ball that has won. A second start winning switch 224b as a winning detection means is provided, and when a game ball is detected by the starting winning switches 224a and 224b, a lottery (whether a lottery or not) is to be performed to generate a jackpot state or the like. ) Is performed, and variable display is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42 described later. When the winning / non-winning lottery is won, a jackpot state in which the variable winning device 32 is opened is given.

  In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the win / loss lottery, and a "high probability state" in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the win / loss lottery. Further, the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, and the "high-ball entering state" in which the game ball can be easily inserted into the second starting prize device 33b, and the blade member 37 is almost at the open position. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the low probability state and low entry state is referred to as "normal mode", the low probability state and high entry state is referred to as "time reduction mode", and the high probability state and high entry state A certain state is called "probability variation mode".

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal mode and the probability variation mode are continued until the big hit state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode does not require the big hit state, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the decorative pattern. When the variable display on the display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times set in advance, the display ends, and the normal mode is entered.

  In the present embodiment, the first start winning device 33a (so-called "navel") and the second starting winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip" is won in the winning lottery performed when the game ball is entered. , Den Chu ”), the type of winning that is awarded does not change depending on whether or not the player wins in the win / loss lottery performed when the game ball enters (type determination that is referenced when determining the type of winning state). The tables are the same).

  More specifically, as the jackpot type, there are 15 round certainty variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as “15RS”), 15 round regular jackpots (hereinafter referred to as “15RN”), and two rounds probability variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as “2RS”). There is. Regarding “15RS” and “15RN”, it means that the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or that eight gaming balls enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened. As for a round, for “15RS”, it is repeated 15 times, and then the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, with regard to "2RS", the variable winning device 32 is opened for 0.4 seconds, which is regarded as one round, which is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. In other words, with regard to "15RS" and "15RN," although it is a jackpot (so-called "big hit with jackpot") in which a large increase in gaming balls can be expected during the jackpot state, "2RS" is a large increase in gaming balls. Is a big hit that is not expected (so-called "big hit without hitting balls").

  Also, after the jackpot state of "15RS", the "probability variation mode" is given, after the jackpot state of "2RS" is given the "(special) probability variation mode", and after the jackpot state of "15RN" is finished, "time" The "shortening mode" (in this example, 100 times of variable display) is given. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, the proportion of 50% is “15RS”, the proportion of 40% is “15RN”, and the proportion of 10%. It becomes "2RS".

  In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning / winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting prize device 33a, and the result of the winning / winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting prize device 33b. Each of the two special display devices 43R is configured by two segment display devices, and is configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, etc. as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are installed at a position visible to the player (a position where the game ball at the lower right of the game area cannot pass in this example).

  And, the switching display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed on the first special display device 43L triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize winning device 33a, and the game ball to the second starting prize winning device 33b. A switching display (variable display) of special symbols is performed on the second special display device 43R triggered by the entry of a ball. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, after the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the winning / winning lottery, that is, "big hit", or by the special symbol when the variable display is stopped , “Out” is definitely displayed. For example, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, a special symbol (combination of illuminated segments) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variable display). ), And when a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, for example, when the "big hit" is won in the winning / winning lottery, the corresponding special symbol is displayed when the fluctuation stops, and the big hit state occurs.

  Further, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the special symbol to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, "15RS", "15RN", or "2RS" is also taught. Further, there is not one stop mode of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type, but there are a plurality of stop modes, and any one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. In addition, in either one of the first special display device 43L and the second special display device 43R, when the variable display or the determination display is being performed, the other is in the off state ("-" is displayed. However, if neither the variable display nor the determination display is performed, “−” is displayed in both.

  Further, the variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 (position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) which is variably displayed upon the passage of the through gate 34, and first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. A decorative pattern display device 42 is provided for performing variable display in accordance with the variable display.

  The decorative pattern display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be capable of variably displaying a decorative pattern as identification information. Further, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 performs an auxiliary operation based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The display content is determined, and the display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display regions of upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are provided in each symbol display region. It is sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then the decorative symbols are displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area). .. For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and the decorative symbol is a jackpot on the decorative symbol display device 42. Is displayed in a combination corresponding to (for example, by lining up on a virtual effective line extending through the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, the upper symbol display area, The same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area and the lower symbol display area), and the jackpot state is started. Incidentally, of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, basically, the upper symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed first is the "first symbol display area". Also referred to as "", the lower symbol display area in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed second is also referred to as "second design display area", and the middle design display area in which the decorative design is finally stopped and displayed. This is also referred to as "third symbol display area".

  Further, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the big hit, as the previous stage, for example, the same decorative design is stopped and displayed in the upper design display region and the lower design display region. In this way, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region, and the state in which the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display region is the reach state. Of course, just because a reach state has occurred does not necessarily mean that it is a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. When it is performed (when the doublet is stopped and displayed), the jackpot state is given. Further, "15RS" is generated in the case of an odd-numbered doublet, and "15RN" is generated in the case of an even-numbered doublet.

  In addition, the combination of decorative patterns other than the doublet basically teaches “out”, but when it is a big hit of “2RS”, the decorative pattern is specified on the activated line, not the doublet. Is displayed in combination (a combination of chance symbols, a so-called chance eye). In the present embodiment, the combination of chance symbols is a mode in which “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect for teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the user is staying. More specifically, a “probability stage” that confirms that you are staying in the probabilistic mode, a “normal stage” that confirms that you are in the normal mode, and a “pullback” that is staying in the time reduction mode. Stage ”. In other words, when the player wins "15RS", the "probability variation stage" is entered after the jackpot state is over. In addition, when "15RN" is won, the game moves to the "pullback stage" after the jackpot state ends, and when the variable display is performed 100 times in the pullback stage, the screen shifts to the "normal stage". In addition, in the present embodiment, as a kind of the “probability variation stage”, there is a “special probability variation stage” that shifts after the jackpot state of “2RN” ends. In the “special probability changing stage”, the background changes slightly as compared with the normal stage and the production balance changes (for example, production patterns that are usually difficult to select are easily selected).

  In addition, when a game ball newly enters the first or second starting winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display corresponding to that is It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display that is currently performed. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of variable displays to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, the game balls that are won in the first start prize device 33a and the second start prize device 33b are won. Corresponding to the game ball, the variable display up to four times (total eight times of variable display) is suspended.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first variation display") based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting winning device 33a, and a gaming ball to the second starting winning device 33b. Regardless of which of the variable displays based on the incoming ball (hereinafter, referred to as the “second variable display”), they are played in the order in which they are held. In other words, for example, the second variation display that has been retained after the first variation display that has already been suspended is exhausted before the first variation display, so that the suspended order is changed. Thus, it is not a structure in which one is preferentially digested.

  Further, the first variable display hold number is displayed immediately above the first special display device 43L and is lit by a first hold lamp 46a capable of emitting blue light, and the second variable display hold number is It is arranged immediately above the second special display device 43R and is lit up and displayed by a second holding lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided in the same number of four as the respective maximum holding numbers of the first variation display and the second variation display, and are the same as the number of the held first variation display or the second variation display. Light. The display contents of the holding lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by the sub control device 262 described later. In addition, when the game ball newly wins the starting winning device 33a, 33b during the big hit state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display that is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning device 33a, 33b is suspended (having the right to execute the variable display) is a decorative design. The display device 42 is also taught. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 43, in the lower portion (holding display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42, a holding icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored is displayed. A maximum of eight hold icons 461 are displayed, and the icons on the left side are sequentially consumed.

  Further, regarding the hold icon 461 of the present embodiment, there is no information as to whether the hold icon 461 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, and basically, which change Even if it corresponds to the display, it has a common mode.

  In the variable display device unit 35 (the position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47 in this example) of the present embodiment, the variable display performed by the decorative pattern display device 42 is the first variable display and the second variable display. A fluctuation specifying lamp 40 is provided to indicate which of the fluctuation displays is displayed. The variation specifying lamp 40 includes an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red, and emits blue light when the decorative pattern display device 42 is performing the first variation display, and the second variation. It emits red light when the display is in progress.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display, for example, "○" or "x" as a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol is changed to "○" → Switching display (variation display) at high speed such as “×” → “○” → ... Then, when the variable display is stopped for a few seconds with a “◯” symbol (winning symbol), the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) is opened for a predetermined time. The display content of the normal symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, during the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 41, if the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34, the variable display for that amount is after the end of the variable display performed at that time. It is configured to be performed. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of times of fluctuation display of ordinary symbols to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it is held up to four times. In addition, the number of times the variable display of the normal symbol is held is arranged to be arranged in the variable display device unit 35 and is turned on and displayed by the holding lamp 44 capable of emitting white light. The holding lamps 44 are provided in the same number as the maximum holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol, and four lights are turned on by the same number as the number of the holding variable display.

  In addition, as the high-ball entry state, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low-ball entry state, (2) one opening time of the second starting prize device 33b ( (Regulated time) is longer than in the low ball entry state, (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per one opening of the second starting winning device 33b is larger than in the low ball entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times of opening the second starting prize device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is higher than that in the low ball entry state, (5) A winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is lower than in the low ball entry state There is also a high state. The configuration of (2) and (5) described above is adopted for the high-ball entering state in the present embodiment. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or an arbitrary combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high ball entry state”. .. As a result, the game balls are likely to be frequently won in the second starting winning device 33b, the number of times the winning / winning lottery is executed is increased, and a decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state. ..

  However, in the present embodiment, even in the low entry state, the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is the same as in the high entry state (1.86 seconds), and the entry support lottery is won. In this case, the time for which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is almost the same (5.7 seconds) as in the high-ball entering state (5.8 seconds). Further, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery is also 15/233, which is a relatively easy probability to win as compared with the conventional pachinko machine which is less than 1/100. As a result, even in the low-ball entering state, the second starting winning device 33b is relatively easily opened, and the variable display of the special symbol is easily held.

  Further, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail constituent portion 51 and an outer rail constituent portion 52 and which guides a game ball shot from the launch device 60 to the upper portion of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball that has been launched in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail forming portion 51. This prevents a situation where the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially front end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail forming portion 52. The game ball that has been launched with a momentum of a predetermined value or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming portion 52 is cut off at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail forming portion 51 is cut off at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the rail 50 may flow backward, so the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are removed from the game area. Get burned.

  Now, the present embodiment is characterized by the starting winning unit 401 in which the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are unitized. Hereinafter, the start winning unit 401 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47 and the like.

  The starting winning unit 401 is a substantially plate-shaped base plate 402 mounted in contact with the front surface of the game board 30, and in front of the base plate 402, a distance allowing a game ball to pass is separated from the base plate 402. And a front decoration portion 403 as a substantially disk-shaped front covering means (general portion) which is provided so as to cover at least the first start winning device 33a and the front of the second start winning device 33b. There is. The front decoration part 403 is made of a transparent or translucent resin material (for example, polycarbonate), and the game balls moving around the first start winning combination device 33a and the second start winning combination device 33b are used as the front decoration part. It is configured to be visible through 403.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), FIG. 47, etc., the base plate 402 communicates with the opening formed in the game board 30, and the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. A pair of upper and lower discharge holes 404 for discharging the game ball entered in the rear of the game board 30 through the opening is formed. Furthermore, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided in front of the respective discharge holes 404 formed in the base plate 402, and have a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens upward. The receiver 405 is provided. A starting winning opening is formed by the opening formed in the upper part of the ball receiving portion 405. Further, the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 405 has a shape that guides the game ball backward (provided with a portion that is inclined downward to the rear), and enters the ball receiving portion 405 through the starting winning opening. The game ball will be guided to the rear discharge hole 404.

  The game nails standing on the front surface of the game board 30 include life nails 406 provided in a pair of left and right above the left and right sides of the start winning hole of the first start prize winning device 33a. The game ball that has passed between 406 is configured to enter the first starting winning device 33a. In the present embodiment, the starting winning unit 401 is arranged below the life nail 406 so that the life nail 406 and the front decorative portion 403 do not overlap.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45B, in the present embodiment, the front decoration portion 403 closes the front side of the ball receiving portion 405. In other words, the front wall portions of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are configured by the front decoration portion 403. In particular, in the present embodiment, each ball receiving portion 405 is formed integrally with the front decorative portion 403, and the ball receiving portion 405 is also made of a transparent or translucent resin material (like the front decorative portion 403). The ball receiving portion 405 of the first starting winning device 33a is made of transparent resin. Hereinafter, a member in which the front decorative portion 403 and the ball receiving portion 405 are integrated is referred to as a “cover unit 407”.

  Further, the cover unit 407 is provided with a mounting boss 408 for mounting the cover unit 407 on the base plate 402 integrally with each ball receiving portion 405. The boss hole of the mounting boss 408 opens rearward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45A, a mounting hole 409 is formed in the base plate 402 so as to correspond to the mounting boss 408. By positioning the mounting boss 408 and the mounting hole 409, The cover unit 407 is attached to the base plate 402 by fixing screws from the rear surface side of the base plate 402. It should be noted that a supporting rib that projects forward and supports the lower surface side of the ball receiving portion 405 may be provided with respect to the base plate 402.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, the base plate 402 of the present embodiment extends to the left and right sides of the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403. Further, a pair of left and right for guiding the game ball, which is formed in the extending portion so as to project forward from the base plate 402 and moves in the game area on the left and right sides of the front decoration portion 403, to the front decoration portion 403 side. The slider 411 is provided. The game ball guided by the slider 411 falls on the blade member 37 in the open position with a relatively high probability when the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state, and goes to the second starting prize winning device 33b. I am supposed to enter the ball. Further, the base plate 402 is formed with a screw hole 412 for fixing the base plate 402 to the game board 30 with a screw at the extending portion.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 47 and the like, in the present embodiment, corresponding to the second starting winning device 33b, the game ball moving in the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion 405 is guided to the ball receiving portion 405. Only by providing the blade member 37 that is displaceable between the open position and the closed position that restricts the movement of the game balls moving in the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion 405 to the ball receiving portion 405 side. Instead, a pseudo blade as a movable covering means that is displaceable between a functional position capable of covering the front of the blade member 37 in the open position and a standby position capable of covering the front of the blade member 37 in the closed position. A member 431 is provided. In the present embodiment, the blade member 37 in the functional position constitutes the guide means.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the blade member 37 has a role of placing a game ball and guiding it to the ball receiving portion 405 when it is in the open position, so that the front and rear width (thickness) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is large in size. On the other hand, in the pseudo blade member 431 arranged in front of the blade member 37 (between the blade member 37 and the front decorative portion 403), the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. In the case (see FIG. 47 (c)), the wall thickness is smaller than that of the blade member 37 so that the game ball can pass through the game area behind the pseudo blade member 431 (between the pseudo blade member 431 and the base plate 402). Is configured.

  Further, as a mechanism for operating the blade member 37, a blade side motor 421 as a blade side driving means for displacing the blade member 37, a substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425 having one end side connected to the blade member 37, The blade shaft 425 is provided on the other end side thereof, and includes a blade pinion 423 provided on the blade drive shaft 422 of the blade motor 421 and a blade gear 426 that meshes with the pinion 423. The blade-side motor 421 of this embodiment is electrically connected to a main controller 261 described later. Further, the blade shaft 425 is fixed to the blade member 37 in a state of being inserted into a substantially circular through hole 427 (see FIG. 46B) formed in the blade member 37 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, as a mechanism for operating the pseudo blade member 431, a pseudo side motor 432 as a pseudo side driving means for displacing the pseudo blade member 431, and a substantially cylindrical pseudo shaft 433 having one end connected to the pseudo blade member 431. And a pseudo gear 436 that is provided on the other end side of the pseudo shaft 433 and that meshes with the pseudo pinion 435 provided on the pseudo drive shaft 434 of the pseudo motor 432. The pseudo-side motor 432 of this embodiment is electrically connected to a sub-control device 262 described later.

  Further, the dummy shaft 433 is inserted inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425, and the dummy blade member 431 is arranged with respect to the front end portion of the dummy shaft 433 that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the blade shaft 425. , And the pseudo gear 436 is attached to the rear end of the dummy shaft 433 protruding rearward from the rear end of the blade shaft 425. With this configuration, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis line of the blade member 37 and the rotation axis line of the pseudo blade member 431 extend on a substantially straight line. Has been done.

  In addition, the front end portion of the dummy shaft 433 has a substantially D-shaped cross section, and the front end portion is inserted into a substantially semicircular recess (not shown) formed on the rear surface of the dummy blade member 431. In this state, it is fixed to the pseudo blade member 431. Further, on the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431, a substantially columnar shaft-supporting convex portion 437 formed so as to project to the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431 is provided along with the formation of the concave portion. Has been. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the present embodiment, a concave bearing portion 438 into which the shaft supporting convex portion 437 is inserted is formed on the rear surface of the front decorative portion 403. As a result, the front end side of the dummy shaft 433, and by extension, the front end side of the blade shaft 425 is supported, and deformation and displacement of the dummy shaft 433 and the blade shaft 425 can be suppressed. It should be noted that it is possible to provide a bearing portion that axially supports the lower portion of the outer peripheral edge of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 on the rotation center side.

  In the present embodiment, the deformed whale is visually recognized in the starting winning unit 401. That is, as shown in FIG. 44, the substantially disk-shaped front decoration portion 403 is basically provided with a character display portion 441 in which a whale is drawn in a colored and transparent hue, and other portions (around the character display portion 441). ) Is a colorless and transparent general portion 442 (which may be colored and transparent with a lighter color than the character display portion 441). However, the front display of the whale is not drawn on the character display portion 441. Instead, the pseudo-feather member 431 represents the forelimb of the whale.

  As shown in FIG. 44B, FIG. 46, etc., the pseudo-blade member 431 has a shape (final shape) imagining the forelimb of a whale, and the whale in the character display portion 441 is colored (for example, semitransparent dark blue). It is made of a colored and transparent resin material. When the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position, the whale's forelimbs are configured to project laterally from the body of the whale. In the present embodiment, the tip portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403 (general portion 442).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47A, in the present embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 at the standby position is located behind the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403 (most of the pseudo blade member 431 is (Hidden by the character display unit 441). In the present embodiment, the whale corresponds to the third object, the part of the whale other than the front legs corresponds to the first object, the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403 corresponds to the first object display portion, and the whale Of the front limbs corresponds to the second object, and the pseudo feather member 431 corresponds to the second object display unit. Furthermore, the state in which the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position corresponds to the completion display state, and the state in which the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position corresponds to the incomplete display state.

  Further, the blade member 37 is also configured to be positioned behind the character display portion 441 when the blade member 37 is in the closed position (the entire blade member 37 in the closed position is hidden by the character display portion 441). In addition, the blade member 37 of this embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. Further, the blade member 37 has a flat (smooth) surface on the upper surface (game ball guide surface) and the front surface in the open position. The front surface and the rear surface of the pseudo blade member 431 are also flat surfaces.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 46B and 47, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to have a larger area than the blade member 37 in a front view, the blade member 37 is in the open position, and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the open position. Whether the blade member 431 is in the functional position or the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the entire front surface of the blade member 37 is covered by the pseudo blade member 431. It is supposed to be. Particularly, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47A, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the functional position side of the pseudo blade member 431 is set. The side portion is configured to be located closer to the open position side than the surface of the blade member 37 on the open position side. Further, as shown in FIG. 47B, when the blade member 37 is in the open position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member 431 (the side portion on the standby position side) ), The upper surface of the blade member 37 (game ball guide surface, surface on the standby position side) is located above (closed position side).

  Although described later in detail, in the present embodiment, among the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431, the blade member 37 does not operate independently, and when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position. The pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position while covering the front of the blade member 37. Further, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position while covering the front of the blade member 37. There is. On the other hand, the pseudo blade member 431 may operate independently, and as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, but the blade member 37 is in the closed position. Is also configured to occur. In other words, it is possible to derive a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member 37 is in the open position (a position other than the closed position) when the blade member 37 is in the closed position. In the present embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 and a mechanism for operating the pseudo blade member 431 (including an operation control function described later) constitute pseudo blade opening means.

  Now, in the area of the game area, the front of which is covered by the front decoration portion 403 (hereinafter, also referred to as “covering area”), at a position below (the ball receiving portion 405 of) the second starting winning device 33b, the covering is performed. A pseudo prize detection switch 445 is provided as a pseudo prize detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the area. Since the pseudo-prize detection switch 445 is provided in the game area, the game ball will continue to move in the downstream-side game area of the pseudo-prize detection switch 445 even after being detected by the pseudo-prize detection switch 445. ..

  Further, the cover area is provided so as to project forward from the base plate 402, and is provided with a guide base 446 as a pseudo prize winning guide means for guiding a game ball moving in the cover area to the pseudo prize detecting switch 445. ing. The guide bases 446 are provided in a pair of left and right, and the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is attached so as to be sandwiched between them. The guide board 446 has a curved shape along the lower edge of the character display section 441 of the front decoration section 403 when the starting winning unit 401 is viewed from the front, and further, the guide board 446 and The entire pseudo prize detection switch 445 is configured such that the front thereof is covered by the character display portion 441 (that is, hidden by the character display portion 441).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 47, the front decoration is located below the area of the game area where the front is covered by the pseudo-vane member 431 in the functional position (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific covering area”). Although the front part is covered with the portion 403, there is a region where the base plate 402 is not provided. As shown in FIG. 47 (c) and the like, in this embodiment, a plurality of (the book) are provided so as to be adjacent to the lower edge portion (below the specific covering area) of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position. Two (in the example, two) game nails (hereinafter referred to as “guide nails 448”) are erected on the game board 30. The plurality of guide nails 448 are arranged in a lower position as they are located closer to the central portion side (the guide base 446 side) in the lateral width direction of the starting winning unit 401, and basically, the game in contact with the upper surface side of the guide nail 448. The ball is guided to the guide base 446 side (the game ball that comes into contact with the upper surface side of the guide nail 448 is not always mounted on the guide base 446, but is mounted with a relatively high probability).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the blade member 37 is at the open position, the game balls hardly come into contact with the guide nails 448 and the guide base 446 located immediately below the blade member 37. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 47A and 47C, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position, the blade member 37 enters the covering region and moves laterally of the blade member 37 in the closed position. The game ball to be played comes into contact with the guide nail 448 and is placed on the guide base 446, or directly placed on the guide base 446. The guide nail 448 is arranged adjacent to the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position and the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403. Further, the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is also seen in a front view. Since it extends continuously with the character display portion 441, the game ball guided to the guide base 446 side by the guide nail 448 may be hidden behind the pseudo blade member 431 and the character display portion 441. Yes, in this case, it becomes difficult to follow the movement of the game ball with eyes. In the present embodiment, the guide base 446 and the guide nail 448 constitute a course changing means.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 is provided with a lower plate communication passage 71 connected to a discharge mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the outlet 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected to the discharge mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 (outer rail forming portion 52) provided on the front surface side of the inner frame 12, and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has the above-mentioned structure. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game balls dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball shot from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns backward on the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is passed to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Is discharged.

  Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). Is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate communicating passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward by the urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion of the lower plate communication passage 71 on the inlet side. In addition, the inlets (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective inlets and the payout passage 67 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with the game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection. It will be discharged to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting the game balls located in the lower plate communication passage 71. By the presence of the full detection switch, it is understood that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate communication passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display on the decorative pattern display device 42, voice, etc. Is controlled. It should be noted that when the game balls are no longer retained in the lower plate communication passage 71 and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is canceled.

  Next, the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally so that they are partially overlapped with each other, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. A protective cover made of resin or the like is attached. Since the payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally called a back pack, the unit is called a "back pack unit 203" here.

  First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover for covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing the front from the opening of the frame cover 213, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked in front and back. Is attached to.

  The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42a in which an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is housed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the board box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving the LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged. Further, the accommodation box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

  Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting the game balls that have won the various winning openings. The game balls collected by the ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mount for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 having the main controller 261 mounted thereon is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  Main controller 261 is housed in substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured to be unsealed without leaving a predetermined trace. As a result, it can be easily found that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the various winning openings, corresponding to various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a variable winning device 32 is provided with a count switch 223. In addition, the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b are provided with a first start prize winning switch 224a and a second start prize winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. There is. The first board surface relay board relays the winning opening switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261 and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start prize winning switch 224a and the second start prize winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without passing through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main controller 261 sends a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid) according to the winning situation at each time to the payout controller 311, and a predetermined number of game balls based on an output signal from the payout controller 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, on the back surface of the game board 30, although not shown, a special winning opening solenoid for opening the special winning opening in the variable winning device 32 is provided. Further, the second start winning device 33b is provided with the blade-side motor 421 that drives the blade member 37 to open and close as described above. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is one in which a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 are integrated. The back pack unit 203 is openably and closably supported on the left side portion (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an opening / closing axis extending along the up-down direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numeral is attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information about the current game state (big hit state, probability variation mode, etc.), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by opening detection switches 91, 92 described later. 12 terminals for outputting information regarding opening, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower plate full error, tank ball out error, and dispensing error, award paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal or the like for outputting information regarding the number of balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of ABS resin, for example, and is provided with a protective cover portion 354 that projects rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is closed, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 opening upward is provided, and the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished to this tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls is appropriately paid out by a predetermined electric configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  In addition, in the payout mechanism unit 352, a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power from the outside is installed. There is. Main power of 24 V AC, for example, is supplied to the power switch substrate 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), a lower frame set 251 which is axially supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and which can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collecting mechanism flow, and the game balls are provided at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. That is, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are collected through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharging chute of the discharging passage portion 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage portion 217, and game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In addition, in this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 can be attached to and detached from the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a front-back manner. Is attached to.

  The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by one board (printed board).

  Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is housed, so that the trace of the unsealed board box 311a remains. Is becoming

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually confirmed.

  In addition, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor occurs, the dispensing motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 protruding outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even if a power failure occurs, and at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery), the state at the time of power failure can be restored. it can. Therefore, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power shutdown is stored and retained. Therefore, when the user wants to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, the power is supplied while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Throw in.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into a key hole of the cylinder lock 700 and is rotated by one side to move the inside. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to allow a wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion on the front surface side of the inner frame 12 (right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side (lower left in FIG. 5) on the back side of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each include a detection unit that can be retracted into and from the switch body. The front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection section faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pushed toward the switch body and is immersed in the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 into the OFF state, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 formed integrally with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main control unit 261 (main board) as a main control unit is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be configured into a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area in which various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

  Further, the RAM 503 is configured such that a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 503 is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the case where the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is in a power-off state (including a power failure in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the values of stack pointers, registers, I / O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main processing when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies hereinafter). Executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, a power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein through a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, etc. are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input / output port 505 includes a winning opening switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning winning switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, various switches of the handle 18, and the like. Various detection parts, various substrates, various solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32, various electric parts such as a blade side motor 421 for opening and closing the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal portions and the like constitute the input / output port 505.

  The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and a ROM 552 storing fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. In addition to the RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the above, an input / output port 554, and a bus line 555, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit not shown Is equipped with. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  To the input / output port 554, the CPU 551, the ROM 552, the RAM 553 are connected via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected. Further, the input / output port 554 has a speaker SP, holding lamps 46a and 46b, a production button 125, a cross button 126, various illumination parts and lamps 102 and 104, a pseudo winning detection switch 445 provided in the starting winning unit 401. A pseudo side motor 432 for operating the pseudo blade member 431 and the like are connected.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display. In the present embodiment, the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 constitute a display control means. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that the jackpot is won is displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261, and the sub-control device 262 is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed as the effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol in the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 storing a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is, similar to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all the data stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 513a is stored. Is backed up. Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer at the time of power-off, each register, in order to return the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned off and the power is turned off again. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. Like the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261. And a command buffer in which the commands sent from are stored.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting permission for payout of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main control device 261, and is turned on when the specific command is received, and is initialized. It is turned off when the process is performed or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, as the specific commands, the payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, the prize ball command for instructing the payout of prize balls, and the main control device 261 are restored. There are three payout return commands transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. The command reception flag is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, the initial setting process or the power shutdown. It is turned off when the command is returned to the previous state, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

  The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from main controller 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and if the commands are stored in all storage areas, they are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 is a ball rental operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to and, respectively, and take in a command of a ball lending operation by the player and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of a game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is allowed to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, a discharge permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal indicates that the player is touching the steering wheel 18, and a discharge prohibition button 18a ( On the condition that (see FIG. 1) is not operated, the launching device 60 is driven, and the game ball is launched with a strength according to the operation amount of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 according to the instruction from the sub controller 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It has and. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, the display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as a pattern displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit for directly operating the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and at the same time, reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It has and.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24 volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. The + 12V power source, the + 5V power source, and the backup power source are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. The firing control device 312 is supplied with operating power (+ 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, etc.) via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. through a control device to which they are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage is less than 22V, determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred, The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure process (NMI interrupt process).

  It should be noted that the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the output voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the power failure process even after the DC stable voltage of 24 V becomes less than 22 V. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erasing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erasing switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 323 being pressed down (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. It

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs the lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a win / loss random number counter C1 as a win / loss random number generation means used for win / no win lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a type used for determination of a jackpot type (type lottery). A decision counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to decide whether or not a reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the win / fail random number counter C1, and a first And the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, which are used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42), and the second start winning device 33b are in the open state. The normal symbol random number counter C4 used in the entry support lottery for determining whether or not to use is used. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for the reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and varied. Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for the fluctuation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative pattern display device 42. Specifically, the determined variation pattern determines the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the variation mode and variation time of the decorative pattern display device 42, that is, the effect pattern.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, it returns to 0 which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

  In the RAM 503, a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the respective values of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selecting counter C3 are stored, and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is normally stored. A variable reserve area is provided. The normal variable holding area includes four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

  Further, the special variation holding area includes eight holding areas (holding first to holding eighth areas) and one execution area. In each reserved area of the special variation reservation area, the winning / discarding random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection are matched with the winning history of the game balls to the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. Each value of the counter C3 is stored in time series. In the present embodiment, each of the first variation display and the second variation display (variation display on the special display devices 43L and 43R) can be reserved up to four times.

  Explaining each counter in detail, the success / failure random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 695, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 695) as a final value, a lower limit value of 0 as a start value. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the win / fail random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win / random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value = 0 to 695) similar to the hit / fail random number counter C1 and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of the normal process. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is updated regularly (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start prize winning device 33a or the second start prize winning device 33b, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation suspension area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode) is 2, and the value is “7,307”, and the high probability. In the state (probability variation mode), the number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20, and the value is “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two win / loss determination tables as win value storing means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. , And "7, 307" as a big hit value, and a second hit / miss judgment table that stores "8-16, 308-316" as a big hit value.

  The type determination counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), returns to the lower limit value of 0. Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to (in the present example, the first start winning device 33a and No matter which of the second start prize winning devices 33b hits the jackpot, the jackpot classification is the same, so there is only one classification determination table). Then, when the jackpot is won in the win / no win lottery, the type of the jackpot state given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (the type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is determined. Will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. ..

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to the lower limit value 0. In the present embodiment, the variation selection counter C3 causes a reach state with respect to the decorative symbol, and then a final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, so that the reach state similarly occurs. After that, the final stop design is determined to be stopped except before and after the reach design, "reach other than out of front and rear" and "complete removal" in which the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, the reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type in the ROM 502 is acquired when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. The first reach determination table that is referred to when determining the reach type (in the case of no big hit) based on the value of the variation selection counter C3, and the acquisition of the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b A second reach determination table that is referred to when determining a reach type (in the case of no big hit) based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 that is set is provided. In the first reach determination table, C3 = 0,1 corresponds to the out-of-front / reach reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than the out-of-front / rear reach, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to the complete out-of-reach. On the other hand, in the second reach determination table, C3 = 0,1 corresponds to the out-of-front / reach reach, C3 = 2 to 11 corresponds to the reach other than the out-of-front / rear reach, and C3 = 12 to 238 corresponds to the complete out-of-contact.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning configuration device 33a or the second startup winning configuration device 33b. ..

  Further, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one fluctuation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then becomes the lower limit value. The variation classification counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, and the other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 37, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 37), returns to the lower limit value of 0. Has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the reach occurs. A finer pattern variation mode such as the elapsed time until (in this example, the middle symbol) is stopped is determined. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or it is also possible to determine the symbol variation aspect by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined by the decoration symbol display device 42 when the variation of the decoration symbol is started.

  The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the win / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 have different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, one is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, and the upper limit value (that is, 232 is reached, and then the lower limit value is returned to 0). The random number counter C4 is updated regularly (once in each of the timer interrupts in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of random numbers that can be won in the ball state is 15, and the range is “1 to 15.” On the other hand, the number of random numbers that is won in the high ball state is 232. The range is “1 to 232.” That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 has a low entrance support determination table referred to in the entry support lottery in the low entrance state, and a high entrance state. Entry support in A high entrance time support determination table referred to in the selection is prepared.When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, the variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined time. After that, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second starting winning device 33b is opened in a pattern according to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process which is activated by the input of the above. For convenience of description, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erasing switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 are read, the state of the switches is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process directly proceeds to the next process.

  In addition, when there is the detection information of the various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. In an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and a prize ball is awarded based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out. ). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

  Further, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the win / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, 695 and 19 respectively). , 238, 232), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503.

  Then, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the start winning device 33 is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process associated with passing the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is once ended.

  Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the RAM 503, a first holding counter Na that counts the number of first variable display holdings triggered by winning the first starting winning device 33a, and a second holding counter Na that starts winning in the second starting winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb that counts the number of variable displays held, and a total number of holds that counts the total number of pending variable displays (the number of the first variable display held and the second variable display held) A counter Nx is provided.

  Further, in the execution area and each of the holding areas of the special variation holding area, a winning / discarding random number storage area for storing the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1, a winning type random number storing area for storing the value of the type determining counter C2, and a variation selecting counter C3 A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

  Further, in the execution area and each of the holding areas of the special variation holding area, whether the first variation display is based on the entry into the first starting prize device 33a or based on the entry into the second starting prize device 33b. A variation storage area is provided in which information indicating whether the display is the second variation display is stored. Hereinafter, "the information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area" is also referred to as "the first variation flag is set on", and "the second variation display is displayed in the variation storage area". "The information indicating that is stored" is also referred to as "the second variation flag is set to ON".

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second starting winning device 33b based on the detection information of the second starting winning switch 224b. When a positive determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). When a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S502, the operation proceeds to step S503, where the second suspension counter Nb and the suspension total counter Nx are incremented by one.

  In the following step S504, the respective values of the win / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 (the random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer are stored). Each stored value) is stored in the first area (winning random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) of the free holding areas of the special variation holding area. After step S504, the process moves to step S505.

  In step S505, a win / loss determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the hit / miss judgment processing will be described later.

  In the following step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area. A type determination process for determining the type of is performed. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the big hit, the value is deviated based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of fluctuation is performed. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, details of the hit / miss determination processing in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches either of “7” and “307” which are the values stored in the first winning / discarding determination table. Determine whether. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are a big hit in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

  Note that, in FIG. 14, the processing of step S 5101 is simplified for convenience of description, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “7”, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “307”. If either of these determinations is affirmative, affirmative determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made. Also in the case where the determination is negative, the determination in step S 5101 is negative.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S5101, the first win / defeat flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this processing ends. When a negative determination is made in step S5101, the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5103 is the value stored in the second win / loss determination table “8 to 16, 308”. .About.316 ". By the way, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” are values that are a big hit only in the probability variation mode. Even in the determination process, in reality, as described above, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 and the respective values corresponding to the jackpot match.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the high probability state is also "disengaged," this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S5103, then in step S5104 the second winning / prohibiting flag is turned on, and then this processing ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the winning and rejecting random number storage area for storing the value of the winning and rejecting random number counter C1, the first winning and failing flag and the second winning and failing flag are not separately provided, but the winning and winning random number storage area has a big hit state. It is configured to store (overwrite) information on whether or not it occurs. In other words, for convenience of description, storing the information in which the jackpot state occurs in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first win / loss flag and the second win / loss flag.

  In addition to the win / loss random number storage area for storing the value of the win / loss random number counter C1, a win / loss flag is provided separately, and the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 is kept stored at this point, and a change display described later is displayed. In the variable display setting process performed at the time of starting, the corresponding table may be referred to based on the value of the random number counter C1 to determine whether or not the result is valid.

  Next, the type determination process of step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second win / loss flag is set to ON in the win / loss determination process performed immediately before. When a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a big hit state will occur), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (a big hit state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is displayed. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value “0-9” corresponding to “15RS”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5202, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, the type determination table is taken into consideration in step S5204, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the value “10” corresponding to “2RS”. , 11 ”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5204, then in step S5205 the 2RS flag is turned on, and then this processing is ended.

  If a negative decision is made in step S5204, the 15RN flag is turned on in step S5206, and then the present process is terminated.

  Next, the second reach determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first win / loss flag has been set in the win / loss determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5401, that is, if the jackpot is a big hit in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the jackpot state is always generated), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, when the jackpot state does not occur (there is a possibility of being out of place) at least in the low-probability state, in step S5402, the reach determination table is taken into consideration and newly added. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to the “front / rear deviation”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5402, then in step S5403 a front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of out-of-front / rear reach is turned on, and then this processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, a front / rear flag is not separately provided in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3, and information indicating that “rear / rear reach” is provided in the reach random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting of the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front / rear flag.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5404, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to “reach other than front / back deviation”. It is determined whether or not any of the values “2 to 11” to be performed matches. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5404, then in step S5405 the flags other than before and after are turned on, and then this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the variable display ends without a reach state, that is, "complete disengagement", the present process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 subsequent to step S507, the advance command setting process is performed. In addition, in the start command, the variation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the variation display) that has been stored on hold is triggered by which of the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b. Information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination processing, the type determination processing, and the reach determination processing is included together with the information indicating whether or not it is to be output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output processing (see step S201). .

  After the processing of step S508, or if the determination in step S501 or step S502 is negative, it is determined in step S509 whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning a prize device 33, the first starting prize switch 224a. It is determined by the detection information of. When a negative determination is made in step S509, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made, in step S510, the value of the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of variable display triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is an upper limit value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). When a negative determination is made in step S510, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S510, the operation proceeds to step S511, and the first suspension counter Na and the suspension total counter Nx are incremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S512, the respective values of the winning / discarding random number counter C1, the type determining counter C2, and the variation selecting counter C3 are set to the reserved areas (the winning / discarding random number storage area, the winning type random number storing area, and the reach random number storing area) which are free of the special variation holding area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

  In step S513, a win / loss determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the win / loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the hit / miss determination processing have already been described above. In other words, in the present embodiment, the winning / judging process based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a and the winning / judging process based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b are common, and by extension, the same game. If it is the mode, the jackpot winning probability in the win / loss lottery is the same.

  In the following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area. A type determination process for determining the type is performed. The details of the type determination process have already been described above. That is, in the present embodiment, the type determination process based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a and the type determining process based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b are common, and by extension the first starting process. Depending on whether or not the jackpot is won in the lottery based on entering the prize device 33a, and when the jackpot is selected in the lottery based on entering the second starting prize device 33b The distribution is the same.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the random number counter C1 does not correspond to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area Based on the value of the selection counter C3, the first reach determination process for determining the type of reach is performed.

  Here, the first reach determination processing of step S515 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first win / loss flag has been set in the win / no win determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot is a big hit in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the big hit state is always generated), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot state does not occur (there is a possibility of being out of place) at least in the low-probability state, in step S5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration and a new one is newly added. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to the “front / rear deviation”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5302, in step S5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out-of-reach is turned on, and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S5302, in step S5304, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the change selection counter C3 newly stored in the special change holding area corresponds to “reach other than front / back deviation”. It is determined whether or not any of the values "2 to 21" to be performed matches. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5304, the flags other than before and after are turned on in step S5305, and then the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the variable display ends without reaching the reach state, that is, "completely disengaged", the present process ends.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, after step S515, in step S516, the advance command setting process is performed, and this process is ended. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 and the like are directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the winning / judging determination process. The configuration determination process and the reach determination process are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, a provisional storage area (working area) for temporarily storing these counter values when the values of the acceptance / rejection random number counter C1 and the like are provided is provided, and regarding the information stored in the provisional storage area, the acceptance / rejection determination processing, the type After executing the determination processing and the reach determination processing, a configuration may be adopted in which the storage is performed in the holding area of the corresponding special variation holding area.

  The process of extracting the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 constitutes a discriminant value extracting process, and the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 extracted in steps S504 and S512 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. In addition, the process of determining whether or not the value of the winning / discarding random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S513 (steps S5101, S5103) is a value corresponding to the winning constitutes the first winning / unmatching determination process, and the determination result is The process of storing (setting the corresponding flag) steps S5102 and S5104 constitutes a result storing process.

  Next, the through-gate passage processing of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined by the detection information of the through gate switch 225. When a negative determination is made in step S601, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). When a negative determination is made here, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S602, that is, it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal hold counter is set. Increment Nc by 1.

  Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number relating to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passage processing is ended.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in backup area 503a of RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information and the NMI interrupt processing is performed. finish.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main process is activated upon a reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initialization process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, in order to set a predetermined value to the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311 and the like) to become operable, for example, 1 Wait processing is executed for about a second. In a succeeding step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  After that, the data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 in order to clear (delete) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. That is, the effectiveness of backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is possible to judge the validity of the backup by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process shifts to a normal process described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM deletion switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is necessary that the information on occurrence of power failure is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value or the like) is normal. Then, the process at power recovery (process at power loss recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

  In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the game state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process shifts to a normal process described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a regular processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed in the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the starting winning device 33 updated in the previous normal process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is output to the sub side. It executes external output processing such as transmission to each control device.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner, it transmits a variation pattern command, a symbol command, etc. to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the display effect according to the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input the variation pattern command, the design command, etc., determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on these various commands, and the variation mode. The display control device 45 is instructed to display (variable display) on the decorative pattern display device 42.

  The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative design such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these fluctuation pattern commands and the fluctuation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern and the like of the variable display based on the change pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, the sound, and the like.

  Here, the variation type of the decorative pattern will be described.

  "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effect display is displayed other than the variation of the decorative pattern. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variation display time is shorter than in the normal mode even in the case of various types of reach. For example, the variable display time for deriving the normal reach is "15 seconds" in the normal mode and "10 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  “Super reach” is a reach that makes the player have a sense of expectation by displaying a character or the like on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established). It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach.

  "Premium reach" is a performance mode that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), characters other than the decorative pattern, such as characters with a pattern different from the super reach, etc. Is displayed in such a manner that the player has a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “2RS” is won, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by a combination of chance symbols, but when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, a unique variable display (Chance change) is being conducted. As an example of the chance change, after the reach state occurs, if the reach is out of front and back or out of reach other than before and after, the change is continued even after the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Along with the effect, a variable display is finally performed in which "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas.

  In addition, the variable display time that is "completely disconnected" that does not reach any reach state is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and "6 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  In addition, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the lapse of the variable time. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, and is a combination of probability variation jackpot symbols, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of chance symbols, a combination of front / rear symbols, and a symbol other than front / rear symbols. It is intended to specify six categories of combination and combination of completely out-of-design. On the other hand, the sub controller 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 stops displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol command.

  If you win the certainty jackpot (“15RS”; hereinafter also referred to as the “probably odd jackpot with coins”) that you can expect to increase the number of game balls, or if you win the regular jackpot (“15RN” or less. , "Also referred to as a normal jackpot with a payout"), the decorative design with the number design is stopped and displayed in the decorative design display device 42 in a combination of double stitches. In the present embodiment, in the case of “probability variation jackpot with payout”, a probability variation jackpot pattern which is a combination of decorative symbols composed of odd-numbered ditches of 1, 3, 5, 7, or 2, or 2 , 4, 6, or 8, the variable display is stopped and displayed in either combination of the regular jackpot pattern, which is a combination of the decorative patterns made up of even-numbered double stitches. , Usually, the variable display is stopped and displayed by a combination of the jackpot patterns.

  When the sub-control device 262 receives a symbol command of a probability variation jackpot with a payout, it determines one of the combinations of symbols consisting of 1 to 9 as a stop symbol, and outputs a payout. When there is a normal big hit symbol command, one of the combinations of the symbols consisting of 2, 4, 6, 8 is determined as a stop symbol.

  In addition, when winning the probability variation jackpot (“2RS”; hereinafter also referred to as “probability variation variation jackpot without payout”) in which an increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected, the decoration symbol display device 42 displays “3” / “from the top”. The combination of the chance symbols “4” and “1” will be stopped and displayed. There is only one combination of chance patterns in this embodiment.

  The combination of the front and rear misalignment symbols corresponds to the "front and rear misalignment reach" in which after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. The combination of the symbols other than the front / rear deviation corresponds to the "reach other than the front / rear deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the reach is generated. The combination of complete detachment patterns corresponds to "complete detachment" in which even the reach does not occur. In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a combination of front and rear deviating symbols, a combination of symbols other than the front and rear deviating symbols, and a combination of completely deviating symbols, it is “disengaged”.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, when the sub-control device 262 receives these out-of-design symbol commands, it determines the combination of symbols stored in the corresponding counter buffer of the RAM 553 as the stopped symbol. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, three commands are prepared for the removal symbol command, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, there is only one type of the removal symbol command, and the sub-control device 262 displays the decorative symbol. It may be configured to determine the combination.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. To do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In a succeeding step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Then, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and determination of a big hit and setting of variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this processing, control relating to the variable winning device 32 is performed. The details of the variable winning device control processing will be described later.

  In step S207, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

  In step S208, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed. The details of this starting winning device control processing will be described later.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) Has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes of step S201 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Repeatedly executed (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

  In step S212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly changes. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Further, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), it means that the power supply has been cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S213 is executed as the power failure processing at the time of power-off. Be seen. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the stack pointer value is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember.

  Then, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, in step S217, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

  The processing of step S209 is the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S208, or the end of one cycle of the processing of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is being executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than in the case where each processing is in the middle. And can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and it is possible to reliably store the state before the power is cut off. ..

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current state is a state other than the big hit state by referring to a hit situation storage area described later. In the "big hit state", the variable winning device 32 and the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R until the variable winning device 32 is opened. It includes an open round period, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period after the final round until the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R can be started. ..

  In the hit state storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in a state other than the big hit state, in the big hit state, "1" in the opening period and the interval period, "2" in the round period, "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in effect.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the jackpot is in the jackpot state, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a special figure display to be described later in detail is performed in step S802. By looking at the setting status of the flag, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42). Specifically, when the special figure displaying flag is in the on state, it is considered to be in the variable display, and when the special figure displaying flag is in the off state, it is considered to be in the stop display, which is a state in which the variable display is stopped. .. As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is started, and the special figure display flags of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are displayed. It is turned off when the variable display is stopped and displayed.

  Then, if a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if it is not in the big hit state and the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S803, and the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are hit. It is determined whether or not the value of the total number of suspension counters Nx that counts the total number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the trigger is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no variable display is held, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if any one of the variable displays is stored in suspension, then 1 is subtracted from the suspension total counter Nx in step S804.

  In a succeeding step S805, a process of shifting the data stored in the special variation holding area is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first area to the holding eighth area of the special variable holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area. Data in each area is shifted in the order of area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S805, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the first variation flag of the execution area is set to ON.

  If the determination in step S806 is affirmative, that is, if the data corresponds to the first variable display based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, in step S807, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na. To do. In a succeeding step S808, processing for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. After that, in step S809, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

  In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S806, that is, when the data corresponds to the second variable display based on the entry into the second starting winning device 33b, in step S810, from the second hold counter Nb to 1 Subtract. In a succeeding step S811, processing for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. After that, in step S809, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

  Details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described in detail later, is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the high probability state (probability variation mode). In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, the mode storage area stores any value of “11”, “12”, and “21”, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12” is the time reduction mode. "21" corresponds to the probability variation mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the state is the high-probability state by determining whether or not “21” is stored in the mode storage area.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S901, that is, if it is in the high probability state (probability variation mode), then in step S902 the first or second random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation suspension area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not one of the win / loss flags (see win / loss determination processing in FIG. 14) is set to ON. When the affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the win / loss lottery in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if it is a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the win / fail random number storage area is taken into consideration, and whether the first win / fail flag is on. Determine whether or not. When an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the win / loss lottery in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, the jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is set to ON. In this embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the winning / discarding random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot determination flag.

  In a succeeding step S905, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag (see type determination processing of FIG. 15) is set to ON by taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S905, that is, if it is "15RS", then 15RS pattern setting processing (processing of setting a variation pattern command and a symbol command) is carried out in step S906. The 15RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variable display for teaching the occurrence of “15RS”, and based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503, The variation pattern (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L, 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S915 described below.

  Further, when the determination in step S905 is negative, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the 2RS flag is turned on. If an affirmative decision is made in step S907, a 2RS pattern setting process is carried out in step S908. After step S908, the process moves to step S915.

  When a negative determination is made in step S907, a 15RN pattern setting process is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S915.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902 or step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won, in step S910, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (Fig. 16, refer to the reach determination processing in FIG. 17) is ON. If the affirmative determination is made in step S910, that is, if the “rear-rear reach” is set, the front-rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S911, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

  If the determination in step S910 is negative, in step S912, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If an affirmative decision is made in step S912, that is, if the "reach other than out-of-front / back-off" has been reached, then a reach pattern setting process other than before / after front is performed in step S913, and then the flow proceeds to step S915.

  If the determination in step S912 is negative, that is, if it is "complete deviation", after performing deviation pattern setting processing in step S914, the process proceeds to step S915.

  In step S915, the special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is set to ON. This indicates that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43L and 43R is satisfied. In a succeeding step S916, a special figure display timer for measuring the variation time (remaining time of variation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R is set. The special figure display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of variable display.

  The fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the setting of the special figure display timer, in the next external output process of the normal process, when the control signal for starting the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R, The switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 which has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the special display device. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols based on the symbol command. After step S916 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 and storing the value in the special variation holding area, the determination process of steps S505 and 513, and the variation display setting. In the processing, the winning / non-winning lottery is constituted by the winning / failing flag and the processing of step S901 to step S903 which determines the winning / no winning based on the situation at that time. Further, the processing of steps S901 to S903 and the like constitute the second hit / miss determination processing, and the processing of step S906, step S908, step S909, step S911, step S913, and step S914 and the like constitute variable display setting processing.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if the affirmative determination is made in step S802, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S812, and the subtraction process of the special figure display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed once, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set to the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction into consideration. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes "0", the affirmative determination is made in step S813.

  When a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this processing ends. In addition, based on the setting content of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S813, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S814, and stop display settings for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R are set in step S815. Based on the setting content of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, the stop display is performed in a stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, disconnection, and the like. Further, a control signal to the effect that stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also output to the sub control device 262. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative pattern display device 42 are reliably synchronized. However, since the sub-control device 262 has already determined the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 by the symbol command or the variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information about the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 again. Need not be added. Further, again, the stop display by such special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42 is merely an auxiliary (for production). There is.

  Subsequently, in step S816, the discrimination information setting process for initializing the hit state and measuring the period of the time reduction mode is performed, and then the present process is ended. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set to ON by referring to the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area. If the determination in step S1001 is affirmative, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1002, that is, when the jackpot is "15RS" or "15RN", the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) is determined in step S1003. "15" is set in the round number counter for discrimination.

  In the following step S1004, "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1005, a value "2000" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set to the special variable timer used for the control during the winning state (opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32). Succeedingly, in a step S1006, "8" indicating eight, which is the maximum number of entered balls per round, is set to a prize counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the variable winning device 32. .. It should be noted that the value of the prize winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 to determine whether or not there is a ball to the variable winning device 32 during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), and then to the variable winning device 32. When it is determined that there has been a ball entry, 1 is subtracted.

  Then, in step S1007, an opening command for transmitting the start of the hit state to the sub control device 262 is set. The opening command includes information on the hit type and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the number of all rounds of the hit state. After step S1007, this process ends.

  It should be noted that, in the jackpot state, the appearance of promotion of the jackpot type in appearance, etc. (for example, when an even-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, it is taught that “15RS” is won in the jackpot state immediately after. Alternatively, when an odd-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the fact that “15RS” has been won in the immediate jackpot state is taught) may be performed.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1002, the round number counter is set to "2" in step S1008. After step S1008, in step S1009, "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. In a succeeding step S1010, a value "500" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 2 seconds is set in the special variable timer, in the step S1011 a winning counter is set in "8", and in the step S1012, the opening is performed. Set the command. Then, this process is completed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1013 whether "12" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the mode is the time reduction mode. When a negative determination is made in step S1013, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1013, then in step S1014, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state of “15RN”, the number of fluctuation displays (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is set in the fluctuation counter, and the special display is performed. Every time variable display of the devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in the step S1014.

  In a succeeding step S1015, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1015, that is, in the end degree of the winning state, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is not yet displayed. If not, the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1015, then in step S1016, "11" indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area. That is, the time reduction mode ends when the variable display is performed the specified number of times on the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After step S1016, in step S1017, a time saving end command for informing the sub control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then this processing ends.

  Next, the variable winning device control processing for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the hit state storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not it is a state other than the big hit state. If the affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot is not in the jackpot state, the present process is ended. By the way, at the start of the big hit state, "1" is set in the hit state storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when the jackpot state is in progress (when any of "1" to "3" is set in the hit situation storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , 1 is subtracted from the value of the special variable timer. By the way, at the start of the big hit state, "2000" or "500" is set in the special variable timer in the determination information setting process.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". When an affirmative decision is made in step S1203, it is decided in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the hit situation storage area.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1204, then in step S1205, "2" is set in the hit situation storage area. In a succeeding step S1206, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a payout. Here, it is determined whether or not the payout is a big hit "15RS" or "15RN" (whether it is other than "2RS").

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1207, the value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1206, a value “100” corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning a prize device 32 is set to the special variable timer in step S1208. To do.

  After step S1207 or step S1208, in step S1209, processing for opening the variable winning a prize device 32 is performed, and in step S1210, a round command for transmitting information to the effect that the round is started to the sub control device 262. Set. Then, this process is completed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1211 whether "3" is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described later in detail, when all the rounds in the jackpot state are finished and the ending period is started, “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. When a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1212.

  In a succeeding step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, when there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1214, and "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. Then, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a payout.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1215, then in step S1216 a value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set for the special variable timer. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1215, the value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1217.

  After step S1216 or step S1217, in step S1218, the winning counter is set to "8". Furthermore, in step S1219, a process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1220, an interval command for transmitting information to the effect that the interval is started is set to the sub control device 262. Then, this process is completed.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, when the time (open time or closed time) for which the open state or the closed state of the variable winning device 32 remains (open time or closed time), the process proceeds to step S1221. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls to the winning device 32 is "0". It should be noted that the winning counter is set to "8" which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round at the start of the big hit state and the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1221, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1221, that is, if the opportunity to end the round has arrived without waiting for the round set period to elapse, then the flow shifts to step S1212. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round is promptly terminated at that point even if the open period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1213, that is, when all the rounds in the jackpot state have been exhausted, the process proceeds to step S1222, and “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. After step S1222, in step S1223, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a payout. If a positive determination is made in step S1223, the value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1224. On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S1223, the value "250" corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set to the special variable timer in step S1225.

  After step S1224 or step S1225, in step S1226, the winning counter is set to "7". When the process of setting the ending of step S1222 or later is performed in the flow after the positive determination is made in step S1221, the value of the winning counter is “0”. If the value of the winning counter is left as it is at the start of the ending period, 0 is suddenly determined in step S1221 in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. Therefore, in step S1226, a temporary numerical value other than “0” (“7” in this example) is entered in the winning counter to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed by another method.

  After step S1226, in step S1227, a process of closing the variable winning a prize device 32 is performed, and in a succeeding step S1228, an ending command for transmitting information to start the ending is set to the sub control device 262. Then, this process is completed.

  If the determination in step S1211 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period has ended and the time to end the jackpot state has arrived, the process moves to step S1229 and end setting processing is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area and the variation counter are set.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the 15RN flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1401, the value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the time reduction mode is added after the jackpot state is completed.

  In the following step S1403, "100" is set to the variation counter. Note that the fluctuation counter is used to display fluctuations for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for understanding that. After step S1403, in step S1404, a time saving start command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the time saving mode is set. Then, this process is completed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1401, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1405. As a result, the probability variation mode is added after the jackpot state ends. After step S1405, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1406, in step S1407, a probability variation start command for informing the sub-control unit 262 of the start of the probability variation mode is set. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S1406, then in step S1408, a special start command for informing the sub-control device 262 of the start of a special probabilistic variation mode, which is a type of probabilistic variation mode, is set. Then, this process is completed.

  The special probability variation mode has the same numerical values as the probability variation mode, the winning probability of the win / loss lottery, the jackpot type distribution ratio, the reach occurrence rate, the probability of winning the ball support lottery, and the like, and the sub-control device 262. The effect contents selected and determined on the side (such as the proportion of the effect pattern to be selected) only partially change, and the main control device 261 side does not make a distinction of the special probability variation mode (simply treated as the probability variation mode). Further, regarding the processing after the step S1405, by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, whether the 15RS flag is set to ON, and the winning type of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area The random number storage area may be referenced to determine whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON, and a predetermined error process may be executed if a negative determination is made.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process of step S1229, in step S1230, “0” indicating that the jackpot situation storage area is not in the jackpot state is set. After that, in step S1231, a hit end command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 to notify the sub-control device 262 of the information that the jackpot state is to be ended, and then the present process is ended. The hit end command includes the number-of-times information of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the general symbol display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is normally displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 is on. In addition, when the general figure display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying the variation.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal suspension counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal holding counter Nc is 0, this processing is ended as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if no variable display of normal symbols is held, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2102, then 1 is subtracted from the normal suspension counter Nc in step S2103.

  In a succeeding step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normal variable holding area to the execution area side, and is the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area.

  After that, in step S2105, the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 41 is set, and the normal symbol variation setting process for starting is executed.

  Here, the universal figure variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable state on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In a succeeding step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the present is a state other than the big hit state. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3202, that is, if the jackpot state is not reached, then in step S2303 it is determined whether or not a value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, a high value. It is determined whether or not the player is in a ball entering state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

  When a positive determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to the normal symbol display timer that measures the variable time (remaining time) of the variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41. Set "465" to make it 1.86 seconds.

  Then, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "0". In the high-income ball state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 that takes a value in the range of "0 to 232" is "1 to 232", the winning is won.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2305, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, when the winning support lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting winning device 33b is won, the winning support lottery is won in step S2306. The entry support flag indicating that is set to ON. After step S2306, in step S2307, an opening confirmation command is set as opening schedule information for informing the sub-control device 262 that it has been decided to open the second start winning device 33b. Then, this process is completed.

  In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, when the jackpot state or the low ball entry state, in step S2308, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol to the universal symbol display timer Is set to 1.86 seconds, "465" is set. Further, in step S2309, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "1 to 15". In the low ball entry state, the winning is achieved when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 that takes a value in the range of "0 to 232" is "1 to 15".

  When a negative determination is made in step S2309, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2309, that is, if the winning support lottery has been won, then in step S2306, the entering support flag indicating that the winning support lottery has been won is set to on, and step S2307 is performed. After the release confirmation command is set in, the present process ends. In addition, the variation display time of ordinary symbols and the winning probability in the entry support lottery can be set appropriately for each model of the pachinko machine, for example, the winning probability of the entry support lottery in the high entry state. The winning probability of the entry support lottery in the low entry state may be higher than the winning probability.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2105, the present processing ends. In addition, based on the setting in the universal symbol variation setting process, in the next external output process of the normal process, when the control signal to start the variable display to the ordinary symbol display device 41 is output, the ordinary symbol display device At 41, variable display is started. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol, and if "○" is displayed, "x", "x" If so, the display is changed (changed) to "○".

  Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2106, and processing for subtracting the universal figure display timer is performed. Every time this process is performed once, the count value of the universal figure display timer is decremented by 1.

  Subsequently, the processing proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the universal figure display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. When the affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the general figure displaying flag is turned off in step S2108, and the general figure stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting content of the normal figure stop display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for performing the stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41. That is, in the case of winning (when the entry support flag is set to ON), the "○" symbol (the winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, it is lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being out, "x" The symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the universal figure discrimination information setting process is performed, and the present process is ended. Here, the universal figure determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entry support flag is set to ON. When a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state is set to on in step S2402.

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not either "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the state is the high-ball entering state. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 5 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set "1450" to be 8 seconds.

  Further, in step S2405, "3" is set to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (remaining number) of opening the second starting winning device 33b so that the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times. After step S2405, the entry support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the support period flag is turned on in step S2409. Further, in step S2410, the setting for opening the second starting winning device 33b is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2411, a support period start command for informing the sub-control device 262 that it is a period during which the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened is set. Furthermore, in step S2412, a blade opening command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 that the timing for opening the second starting winning device 33b has arrived. Then, this process is completed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 5.7 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. "1425" is set. In a succeeding step S2407, the opening number counter is set to "1" so as to open the second starting winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408 the turning-on support flag is turned off, in step S2409 the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, the setting for opening the second starting winning device 33b is performed, and then step S2411. In step S2412, the support period start command is set, and in step S2412, the blade opening command is set, and then the process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, when a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is performed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", the display is switched to "x", and if "x", the display is switched to "○". Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the starting prize winning apparatus control processing in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the support period flag is on. When a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2201, the value of the ordinary variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S2202. In a succeeding step S2203, it is determined whether or not the normal variable flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, when the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, when the predetermined opening time of the second starting winning device 33b has not yet elapsed, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2204, then the flow shifts to step S2205, and a blade closing command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 that the timing for closing the second starting winning device 33b has arrived. .. Then, in step S2206, the normal variable flag is turned off. In a succeeding step S2207, the value of the opening number counter is decremented by 1, and in a step S2208, the second starting winning device 33b is set to the closed state.

  Then, in step S2209, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening counter is “0”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2209, the flag during the support period is turned off in step S2210. Furthermore, in step S2211, a support period end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 that the period for opening the second start winning device 33b has ended. Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2209, that is, the winning entry support lottery has been performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times based on that. If there is the remaining number, the value corresponding to the interval time (for example, "250") is set to the ordinary variable timer in step S2212. After step S2212, this process ends.

  In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, when it is the interval period during which the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2213. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normally variable timer is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S2213, that is, when the interval period has not yet elapsed, this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2213, then the ordinary variable flag is turned on in step S2214, and in step S2215 a value corresponding to the opening time for the ordinary variable timer (in this example, in the high-ball entering state; 1450 ", low ball entry state;" 1425 ") is set, and in step S2216, the second start winning device 33b is set to the open state. After that, in step S2217, the blade opening command is set, and then this processing is ended.

  When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, if the specified number of game balls (for example, one) has entered the second starting prize device 33b, the second starting prize device 33b. May be immediately closed (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the second start prize switch 224b is detected, and an affirmative determination is made). In that case, the process may proceed to step S2205.)

  Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first, the reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is once put on standby, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001, and the command transmission from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. The command reception flag is turned on, and this reception interrupt processing ends. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Will be updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is assumed to be the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, and if the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on and the command determination process may be performed if no command is received. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command is received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at every predetermined interval.

  Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311. This main processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initialization process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value and the interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and the external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

  Then, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interrupts.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at power recovery (when power failure is restored) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is returned, in step S3110 the power-off occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interruption is permitted.

  After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in step S3122 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, and therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as the power failure processing when the power is cut off. In the power outage process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination process described later is executed in step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, the RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 513 that are backed up.

  In the process of step S3122, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed after the process performed when the power is turned on, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the case where each process is in progress. It is low and can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

  Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the command determination process is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination processing (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28) described above.

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  In the processing of steps S3304 to S3306, the type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306, is it a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Then, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 receives the payout initialization command and then performs the initialization process of the RAM 513. Therefore, the timing when the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing when the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the deviation of the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the adverse effects of Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 has been initialized, the payout permission of the prize balls can be set with certainty.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, the payout initialization command is not received when the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, the prize balls will not be paid out. Although a bad effect is caused to cause a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before power-off, In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on in order to permit the payout of prize balls. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, since the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, the read pointer becomes the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the prize ball number corresponding to the command to the total prize ball number stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the prize balls can be paid out early for the winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, since the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, the read pointer becomes the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO) nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Here, the flow chart of FIG. 30 will be described again. When the command determination process ends, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S3202, then in step S3203 a firing permission is set for the firing control device 312, and in step S3204 the state return switch 321 is checked to determine if the state return operation has started. Execute the return operation. By this processing, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor occurs, the dispensing motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state). ..

  After that, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full tank is set, and when the lower plate is no longer full, Execute the setting of the plate full release status. In addition, in step S3206, the tank sphere-free state (ball-out state) or the tank sphere-free state (ball-present state) is set according to the change in the state of the tank sphere. That is, the tank ball no switch is detected by the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the tank ball no state is set, the tank ball no state is set, and the tank ball no state is lost. Execute the setting.

  After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is performed.

  Subsequently, a payout control process of prize balls and ball rental is executed. More specifically, the payout amount setting process is performed in step S3208, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to perform the ball removal process by driving the payout motor on condition that the ball removal operation is not disabled and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a blocked state. Then, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

  Next, a normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

  If the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and if the commands are stored in all storage areas, they are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In a succeeding step S3903, a reservation information storage process of storing the advance command information output from the main control device 261 in the reservation information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is performed. In the starting command, as described above, information indicating which of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variation display triggered by the winning, the variation information corresponding to the jackpot. It includes information indicating whether there is a jackpot, information indicating a jackpot type, and information indicating a reach type.

  The holding information storage area of the sub-control device 262 includes eight holding areas (holding first to holding eighth areas) and one execution area, like the special variable holding area of the main control device 261. According to the reception history of the advance command, the pending information storage area corresponds to the information on whether or not it is a jackpot included in the advance command, the jackpot type, the reach type, the first variation display or the second variation display. Information (variation information) about variation display such as information as to whether or not there is stored in time series. As a result, not only the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in the holding area can be grasped by the sub control device 262.

  The pending information storage processing will be described below with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the advance command is received (whether or not the advance command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative decision is made in step S4101, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4101, then in step S4102, the variable hold counter Nd that counts the number of held variable information items held in the held information storage area is incremented by one. Further, in step S4103, information on whether or not it is a big hit included in the advance command, a big hit type, a reach type, which of the first variation display and the second variation display, and the like are stored in the pending information storage area. It is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas.

  In subsequent step S4104, advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where intentionally deriving effect displays related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is given). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to give the continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of the continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the pending information storage area. Of these, the fluctuation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4103.

  The continuous announcement counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 49, for example, and then returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 49). The continuous notice counter is updated regularly, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

  The advance notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one in a range of 0 to 9 and reaches an upper limit value (that is, 9) and then returns to a lower limit value of 0. The advance notice type counter is updated periodically, and the value of the advance notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (previous notice type counter buffer) each time.

  Then, in the notice information storage process, when the variable information is stored in the pending information storage area, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each holding area and execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notification flag which is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notification is derived.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give consecutive notices, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the manner of consecutive notices. A plurality of advance notification success / failure determination tables and advance notification tables are provided, and the advance notification success / failure determination table and the advance notification table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the variation information.

  After step S4104, in step S4105, it is determined whether or not the information newly stored in the holding area corresponds to the first variable display. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4105, then in step S4106, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the extinguished state is turned on. The first holding lamp 46a of the present embodiment emits blue light.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4105, one of the second hold lamps 46b in the off state is turned on in step S4107. The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light.

  After step S4106 or step S4107, in step S4108, a continuous announcement lottery process for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4108, when the value of the variable holding counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the holding information storage area, the jackpot type and reach are determined. It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice by referring to the notice success / failure determination table corresponding to each type and game mode. Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode is referred to based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the holding information storage area. Then, it is determined whether to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flags of all holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas in the holding information storage area are turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, after step S4108, in step S4109, a hold icon setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed. After step S4109, this process ends.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 as the entry detection corresponding display means is an image object simulating a “buoy”. ing. In the hold display area 462, up to eight hold icons 461 can be displayed. Further, as the hold icon 461 of the present embodiment, a “main hold icon 463” and a main hold icon 463 are displayed as a ball entry detection corresponding display indicating that the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is held. There is a “temporary hold icon 464” as a preliminary display that may be displayed as a previous stage.

  The patterns of the mode of the hold icon 463 are "a striped pattern of a floating ring is blue", "a striped pattern of a floating ring is red", and "a character using a floating ring (see FIG. 43 (b)). 463a) "is displayed, and" Character B using a float (see 463b in FIG. 43 (c)) "is displayed. On the other hand, the temporary hold icon 464 is an image object in which the “float”, which is the basic mode of the main hold icon 463, is blurred (thinned). The character A and the character B may each be of one type or a plurality of types.

  As a display pattern of the hold icon 461, a pattern in which the main hold icon 463 is suddenly displayed, and after the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed, the main hold icon 463 is displayed so as to change from the temporary hold icon 464. Pattern (the pattern is also referred to as “via sign”). Further, as will be described later, the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is associated with the winning expectation degree (big hit expectation degree) for the jackpot state occurrence, and the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by the display pattern of the hold icon 461 ( The pre-reading pending notice production is performed).

  Here, the pending icon setting process performed in step S4109 of the pending information storage process (see FIG. 35) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4301, the value of the icon lottery random number counter used when determining the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is acquired and stored in the hold icon information storage area of the corresponding hold area in the hold information storage area. The icon lottery random number counter is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 199, reaches an upper limit value (that is, 199), and then returns to a lower limit value of 0. .. The icon lottery random number counter is periodically updated, and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer each time. In step S4301, the value of the icon lottery random number counter is acquired from the counter buffer.

  Subsequently, in step S4302, the hold icon pattern storage table that stores the correspondence between the value of the icon lottery random number counter and the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is referred to, and the icon lottery random number counter stored in the hold icon information storage area is displayed. The display pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined based on the value.

  As shown in FIG. 39, a plurality of hold icon pattern storage tables are provided. In the present embodiment, one for big hits that is considered in response to variation information that teaches big hits, one for front and back that is referred to for variation information that becomes front and rear deviations, and a reach other than front and rear deviations. There are two types, one for removal except before and after taking into consideration the following variation information, and one for other (complete removal).

  Regarding the big hit holding icon pattern storage table, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "0 to 59", it corresponds to "a blue striped floating ring (which changes from the temporary holding icon 464)" If the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "60 to 139", it corresponds to the "red striped floating ring via the omen", and if the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "140 to 158", the "via sign" Corresponding to "Character A" of the icon lottery, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "59", it corresponds to "Character B of the omen", and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "160 to 179" It corresponds to "no blue striped float" and corresponds to "no red flag striped float" when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "180 to 199".

  Regarding the reserved icon pattern storage table for out-of-front / back deviation, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "0 to 59", it corresponds to "a blue striped floating ring via a sign" and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is " In the case of “60 to 99”, it corresponds to “a red striped floating ring via a sign”, and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “100 to 104”, it corresponds to “a character A via a sign” and icon lottery When the value of the random number counter is "105 to 184", it corresponds to the "blue striped floating ring without aura", and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "185 to 199", "red without aura" Corresponding to "striped float".

  Regarding the reserved icon pattern storage table for out-of-order except for the case, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "0 to 59", it corresponds to "a blue striped float passing through a warning sign", and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is In the case of "60 to 89", it corresponds to the "red striped floating ring with aura", and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "90 to 189", "blue striped floating ring without aura" In the case where the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “190 to 199”, it corresponds to “a red striped floating ring without a sign”.

  Regarding the reserved icon pattern storage table for other than that, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “0 to 19”, it corresponds to “a blue striped floating ring via a sign” and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “ The case of "20 to 199" corresponds to the "blue-striped floating ring without a precursor."

  In other words, the red-striped pattern has a higher jackpot expectation than the blue-striped pattern, and the red-striped pattern is more likely to pass through the omen, and the character with a higher jackpot expectation is more likely to go through the omen. A or character B may be derived. In particular, when the character B is displayed, it can be understood at that point that the jackpot state will occur after the end of the corresponding variable display.

  Then, in step S4302, based on various information stored in the holding area of the holding information storage area, the change pattern of the corresponding variable display is determined, and the hold icon pattern storage table to be referenced is determined according to the change pattern. To do. Further, it is determined which value of the icon lottery random number counter corresponds to the display pattern of the hold icon 461, and information indicating the display pattern of the hold icon 461 that is determined to correspond is displayed in the corresponding hold area. Will be stored in the hold icon information storage area (determine the display pattern of the hold icon 461).

  When it is determined in step S4302 that the variation pattern corresponds to the big hit, the display pattern of the hold icon 461 in which the character B is displayed in the hold area of the hold information storage area and the hold icon information storage area of the execution area. Check whether or not the information indicating is stored, and if it is stored, refer to another (for example, front / rear) holding icon pattern storage table instead of the holding icon pattern storage table for jackpot. It may be configured to do so.

  After step S4302, in step S4303, it is determined whether or not the hold icon 461 determined in step S4302 is the via-passage hold icon 461. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4303, then in step S4304, the pending change flag of the corresponding pending area is set to ON. The hold change flag indicates that the temporary hold icon 464 is scheduled to change to the main hold icon 463. In the present embodiment, the hold change flag is set to ON, and thus the hold change flag is stored in the corresponding hold area. The temporary holding icon 464 is displayed corresponding to the changed information (in other words, the holding change flag indicates whether or not the temporary holding icon 464 is displayed). Further, the pending change flag is provided in each pending area of the pending information storage area.

  After step S4304 or if a negative decision is made in step S4303, a hold icon display process is executed in step S4305. Here, processing for additionally displaying the hold icon 461 (main hold icon 463 or temporary hold icon 464) determined in step S4302 is performed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42. Then, this process is completed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, with respect to the hold icon 461, the first variation display based on the entry into the first starting prize device 33a, and the first variation display based on the entry into the second starting prize device 33b. It is a common mode in which it is not specified which one of the two variable displays corresponds. However, it is possible to determine which of the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b is a fluctuation display based on a ball entered by checking the fluctuation identifying lamp 40 and the transition of the lighting mode of the holding lamps 46a and 46b. It is configured to be able to.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3915.

  In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying a decorative design. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the upper / middle / lower of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, which are used to set each deviation symbol in the lower symbol display area. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  When the big hit state occurs, the big hit decoration symbol counter CO determines the pattern (big hit pattern) when the decoration pattern display device 42 stops changing, and in the present embodiment, as the big hit decoration symbol counter CO. , 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 8 and returned to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

  When a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stopped is received from the main control device 261, for example, the counter value is 0 based on a table (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) not shown. In that case, the combination of the jackpot symbols is determined, such as “1” (the doublet) and 1 and “2” (the doublet). The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated by the counter updating process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub controller 262 receives the symbol command, as described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the symbol command or the like. You can

  In addition, when a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped is received, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, "2" (doublet), if 2 to 4, "4" The combination of the jackpot symbols is determined such that (6) (6) (5), 6 (6) (7), and 7 (8) (8) (8).

  Each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determines the combination of the respective stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / winning lottery is missed. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the row, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each. The stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. .. The respective symbol counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach front / back reach design buffer of RAM 553, the reach design buffer other than the front / back removal, and complete. It is stored in any of the out-of-design symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether it is the update time of the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether it is the update time of the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative decision is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative decision is made in step S4002. Then, if it is the update time of the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. Moreover, if the update timing of the middle symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if the lower symbol counter CR is updated (NO in steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, The calculation result is set as the current value of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

  According to the above CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update processing, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. There is no. As a result, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

  Then, in step S4006, whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same) is determined. If it is determined and it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), in step S4007, it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol in the middle symbol display area are the same). Determine whether. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4007, the present processing is terminated without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, then in step S4008, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of front and rear deviation symbols. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of front and rear deviation symbols (rear deviation from front and rear) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is before and after the RAM 553. This is stored in the out-reach symbol buffer, and this processing ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of symbols other than front and rear (reach other than front and rear) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear of the RAM 553, and this processing is ended.

  If the combination is a combination other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the detachment symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the detachment symbol (completely detached symbol), so in step S4011, the The combination of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the complete deviation symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this processing is ended.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a holding process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the holding process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative decision is made in step S4201, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4201, the value of the variation hold counter Nd is decremented by 1 in step S4202.

  After step S4202, in step S4203, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including flag information such as a continuous notice flag) stored in the first holding area to the eighth holding area of the holding information storage area to the execution area side, The data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved first area → execution area, the reserved second area → the reserved first area, the reserved third area → the reserved second area, the reserved fourth area → the reserved third area.

  In a succeeding step S4204, it is determined whether or not the command is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first fluctuation display. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4204, in step S4205, one of the lit first holding lamps 46a is turned off. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4204, in step S4206, one of the second holding lamps 46b in the lit state is turned off.

  After step S4205 or step S4206, in step S4207, advance notice setting processing for determining the type of display effect used for continuous advance notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4108) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is turned on. Since this is not performed, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, what is the type, and if it is not a jackpot, what is the reach type? , The type of continuous notice is determined by referring to the corresponding table. The continuous notice of the type determined here is derived at the desired timing when the corresponding variable display is performed.

  After step S4207, in step S4208, if there is a pending change flag that is set to on, processing to turn it off is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold change flag of a predetermined hold area is set to ON, the corresponding hold icon 461 is displayed in the form of the temporary hold icon 464. .. That is, for example, in the case where information (see FIG. 39, etc.) for displaying the via-holding hold icon 461 is stored in the hold icon information storage area of the hold area, the hold change flag of the hold area is turned on. When the holding change flag of the holding area is turned off, the temporary holding icon 464 is displayed as the holding icon 461 corresponding to the holding area, and when the holding change flag of the holding area is turned off, the temporary holding icon 461 corresponding to the holding area is temporarily held. Instead of displaying the icon 464, the book holding icon 463 is displayed.

  In a succeeding step S4209, a holding icon shift process for shifting the holding icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. That is, in the data shift process of step S4203, since the information regarding the hold icon 461 is also shifted, the hold area in which such information is stored and the hold icon 461 in the hold display area 462 of the decorative pattern display device 42 are stored. The hold icon 461 is redrawn in order to associate it with the display location of. Therefore, in the hold display area 462, the hold icon 461 located on the leftmost side is erased and the hold icon 461 arranged on the right side thereof is erased each time one variable display is consumed (executed). Is shifted to the left by one (the display location is moved). When the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed, the temporary hold icon 464 changes into the main hold icon 463 when the hold icon 461 is shifted (in the hold display area 462, for example, A display that changes from the aspect of 43 (a) to the aspect of FIG. 43 (b) is derived.

  After step S4209, this process ends. In the present embodiment, the temporary holding icon 464 is configured to change to the main holding icon 463 without fail when one variable display is consumed and data shift processing is performed. When the shift processing is performed a plurality of times, the book holding icon 463 may change, or the book holding icon 463 may change not only at the timing of starting the variable display but also at the timing of the variable display. The effect of changing the main hold icon 463 may be performed at the stage of shifting to the execution area.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a display setting process is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol, and the like, and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, control such as outputting the determined items as a display command to the display control device 45 is performed.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, the symbols are cooperated with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45. The variable display of is continued.

  Further, when the variable display is started, when the continuous notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4108) is on, each situation is determined based on the change information of the change pattern command. The table corresponding to is used to determine the type of continuous notice to be derived in the variable display, to determine the derivation of notice production different from the continuous notice, and to perform display corresponding to the operation of the production button 125 or the like. Or Furthermore, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process of performing an effect control during a big hit (hit display process) is also performed.

  Here, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot state has been received from main controller 261. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4701, then in step S4702 a "15RS" or "15RN" is sent to the round grasp counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds, based on the information contained in the opening command. If there is, "15" is set, and if "2RS", then "2" is set.

  After that, in step S4703, if there is a big hit with a payout, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative pattern display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is performed. finish. Note that the sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effect modes in the jackpot state. You will choose and let it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if the jackpot with a payout is a jackpot, the production is set during a round of up to 30 seconds, and then this processing is ended.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4706, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and in the case of a jackpot with a payout ball, in step S4708, the effect is set during an interval of 4 seconds, and then this processing is ended.

  If a negative decision is made in step S4706, it is decided in step S4709 whether or not an ending command is received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4709, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if a big hit with a payout ball is set in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then this processing ends.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot without jackpot, each period such as an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period (1 second). Rather than setting the performance separately, it is set to perform the performance (announcement, etc.) throughout the entire period.

  If a negative decision is made in step S4709, it is decided in step S4712 whether or not a hit end command has been received. If a negative decision is made in step S4712, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4712, then in step S4713, the ending display is immediately terminated, and setting is made so as to be in the normal game state mode in which variable display is carried out. Then, this process is completed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3908, the main hold icon 463 may be displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 (maybe the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is held and stored. Pseudo hold icon setting processing for performing control related to the pseudo-ball-on-detection correspondence display and the pseudo hold icon 466 as the pseudo winning mode, which is derived to perform an effect such as "I do not know".

  The pseudo hold icon 466 has the same form as the temporary hold icon 464 described above, and even if the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed in the hold display area 462, it is the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon. It is not possible to distinguish which of the icons 464 it is. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43A, a large number of multiple objects are provided in front of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464, in front of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464. A bubble display 467 in which bubbles continue to rise is displayed. In this embodiment, the bubble display 467 corresponds to the additional display.

  Here, the pseudo hold icon setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not there is the detection information of the pseudo winning award detection switch 445. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4501, in step S4502, a pseudo lottery random number used in a lottery to decide whether or not to display the pseudo holding icon 466 and whether or not to displace the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position. The value of the counter CG is acquired. The pseudo-lottery random number counter CG is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, reaches an upper limit value (that is, 29), and then returns to a lower limit value of 0. There is. The pseudo lottery random number counter CG is periodically updated, and the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is stored in the corresponding counter buffer each time. In step S4502, the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is acquired from the counter buffer.

  In a succeeding step S4503, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo random selection random number counter CG is any of "0 to 9". If an affirmative decision is made in step S4503, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4503, it is determined in step S4504 whether the value of the pseudo-lottery random number counter CG is any of "10 to 19". If a negative decision is made in step S4504, then in step S4505, a pseudo permission flag used for deciding whether or not to displace the pseudo blade member 431 (by itself) to the functional position is set ON.

  After step S4505, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S4504, in step S4506, the value of the variable hold counter Nd that counts the number of hold of the variable information held in the hold information storage area is "1". It is determined whether or not it is greater than or equal to "8" (whether it is "1 to 7"). If a negative determination is made in step S4506, that is, if no variable display is held, or if no more variable display can be held, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4506, then in step S4507 a pseudo hold icon display process for displaying the pseudo hold icon 466 is performed. In the pseudo hold icon display process, the number of variable displays (variation information) currently held is confirmed by the value of the variable hold counter Nd, and the corresponding position in the hold display area 462 (the game ball is next When detected by the second start prize switch 224b, the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed at a position where the hold icon 461 indicating the hold of the corresponding variable display is displayed). After step S4507, in step S4508, the pseudo hold flag indicating that the pseudo hold icon 466 is being displayed is set to ON, and then the present process ends.

  If a negative decision is made in step S4501, it is decided in step S4509 whether or not the pseudo hold flag is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S4509, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4509, it is decided in step S4510 whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4510, then in step S4511, the process of deleting the pseudo-holding icon 466 is performed, and in step S4512 the pseudo-holding flag is turned off, and then this process ends. That is, the pseudo hold icon 466 is erased when the process of shifting the information in the hold information storage area (step S4203) is performed.

  If a negative decision is made in step S4510, then it is decided in step S4513 whether or not the advance command is received. If a negative decision is made in step S4513, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4513, then in step S4511 the process of deleting the pseudo hold icon 466 is carried out, and in step S4512 the pseudo hold flag is turned off, and then this process ends. In this case, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the mode of the hold display area 462 is switched and displayed, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (d).

  That is, the pseudo hold icon 466 of the present embodiment is immediately erased when the variable display is newly held even before the process of shifting the information in the hold information storage area is performed. Become. In this case, in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the hold icon 461 is displayed instead of the pseudo hold icon 466. However, when the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed as the hold icon 461, Since the mode is the same as that of the pseudo hold icon 466, the appearance does not change.

  On the other hand, in the case where the main hold icon 463 is displayed instead of the pseudo hold icon 466 (when the display pattern of the hold icon 461 without a sign is selected), the mode of the hold display area 462 is, for example, The state shown in FIG. 43 (a) is switched to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) or FIG. 43 (c). The same switching display mode is used when the temporary hold icon 464 is changed to the main hold icon 463.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3909, a pseudo blade opening control process for performing control related to the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 provided in the second starting winning device 33b is performed. Hereinafter, the pseudo blade opening control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not a blade closing command (see step S2205 in FIG. 27) output from the main controller 261 is received at the timing when the blade member 37 in the open position is displaced to the closed position. To do. If a positive determination is made in step S4601, the process of displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position is performed in step S4602, and then this process is ended. By performing the processing, the pseudo blade member 431 controlled by the sub-control device 262 is controlled by the main control device 261 and is synchronized with the blade member 37 that is displaced from the open position to the closed position. It is designed to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4601, the blade opening command output from the main control device 261 at the timing when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position in step S4603 (step in FIG. 26). It is determined whether or not S2412 (see step S2217 in FIG. 27) is received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4603, then in step S4604 the process of displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position is carried out, and then this process ends. By performing the process, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced from the standby position to the functional position in synchronization with the blade member 37 that is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4603, in step S4605, has the open confirmation command (see step S2307 in FIG. 25) output from the main control device 261 received at the timing of winning in the ball entry support lottery? Determine whether or not. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4605, then in step S4606 the individual operation invalidation flag that prohibits the pseudo blade member 431 from operating alone is set to ON.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4605, in step S4607, at a timing when the opening / closing process of the series of second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) performed by winning in the ball entering support lottery is completed. It is determined whether or not the support period end command (see step S2211 in FIG. 27) output from the main control device 261 has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4607, then the individual operation invalidation flag is turned off in step S4608.

  After step S4608 or step S4606, or if a negative determination is made in step S4607, in step S4609 the pseudo blade member 431 is alone displaced to the functional position (the blade member 37 is in the closed position). It is determined whether or not the pseudo open flag indicating that there is is set to ON.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4609, a pseudo permission flag that will be turned on with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected in step S4610. It is determined whether or not (see step S4505 in FIG. 40) is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S4610, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4610, then in a step S4611, it is decided whether or not the individual operation invalidation flag is set to ON. When a negative determination is made in step S4611, it is determined in step S4612 whether or not the jackpot state is in progress.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4612, the pseudo open flag is set to ON in step S4613. In subsequent step S4614, a value corresponding to the time for keeping the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is set in the pseudo opening timer used for the opening / closing control of the pseudo blade member 431. Further, in step S4615, a process of displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position is performed. After that, in step S4616, the pseudo permission flag is turned off, and then this processing is ended.

  If a positive determination is made in step S4611 or step S4612, steps S4613 to S4615 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S4616. That is, when a series of opening and closing controls for opening the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) is being performed, or during the jackpot state, the pseudo blade member 431 is independently operated by the pseudo blade opening control process. The operation is configured not to execute.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S4609, then in a step S4617, it is decided whether or not the individual operation invalidation flag is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S4617, the pseudo open timer is decremented by 1 in step S4618.

  In a succeeding step S4619, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo open timer is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S4619, that is, when the timing for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position has not yet come, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4619, the pseudo opening flag is turned off in step S4620, the pseudo opening timer is reset in step S4621, and the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the standby position in step S4622. After performing the process, this process is terminated.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S4617, then steps S4618 and S4619 are skipped, and the flow moves to step S4620. That is, in the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the moving blade member 37 and the front of the blade member 37 displaced to the open position are covered so as to cover the pseudo blade. The member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position. Furthermore, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the front of the moving blade member 37 is covered so that the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced from the functional position to the standby position. It is configured. Therefore, it is inconvenient if the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position. Therefore, prior to displacing the blade member 37 to the open position, it is determined that the blade member 37 should be displaced to the open position (output from the main control device 261 when winning the ball entry support lottery). If the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position at the timing when the opening confirmation command is received and the single operation invalidation flag is turned on, the pseudo blade member 431 is returned to the standby position.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3910, in the jackpot with a payout state, the pseudo blade member 431 and the effect button 125 are used to perform a pseudo blade effect that suggests whether or not to promote to the probability variation jackpot. A blade effect process is performed. The pseudo blade effect process will be described below with reference to FIG. 42.

  First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a payout. If a negative decision is made in step S4801, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4801, it is decided in step S4802 whether or not the production button 125 has been operated. If a negative decision is made in step S4802, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been taught to be a probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4803, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4803, a big hit medium pseudo open lottery is performed in step S4804 to determine whether or not the pseudo blade member 431 is set to the functional position. Here, a corresponding random number counter and a table that stores the corresponding relationship between the random number counter and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 are used. In the table, there are ones that are referred to when the probability variation big hit and those that are normally referred to when the big hit.

  The table that is usually referred to during a big hit is a small displacement pattern (for example, 35%) that displaces the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position side by about 40 degrees, and a large displacement pattern (for example, 5%) that displaces the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position. ) And a pattern that does not displace (for example, 60%). On the other hand, the table referred to at the time of probability variation jackpot is a small displacement pattern (for example, 45%), a large displacement pattern (for example, 10%), a pattern that does not displace (for example, 40%), and the promotion effect to the probability variation jackpot is confirmed. It is set so as to be assigned to a pattern (for example, 5%).

  In a succeeding step S4805, a process corresponding to the result of the big hit medium pseudo open lottery is executed. That is, when the small displacement pattern or the large displacement pattern is selected, the process of displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position side and returning it to the standby position after a specified time is executed. In addition, when the confirmation pattern is selected, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position side and returned to the standby position after a specified time, the process for starting the promotion effect, and the probability variation jackpot. The process of storing that the state has already been taught (setting the corresponding flag to the default state) is executed. Then, this process is completed. In the present embodiment, in the decorative pattern display device 42, the teaching about winning the probability variation jackpot (15RS) with a payout is configured to be performed at least by the time the corresponding jackpot state ends. Has been done.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3911, the lighting pattern of the lamps / illuminations is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the voice setting process of step S3912, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a command relating to voice such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from main controller 261, setting for performing these controls is also performed in step S3912.

  In step S3913, customer wait production (for example, demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state where the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is not displayed; energy-saving mode), control settings, etc. Process.

  In step S3914, an external output process of transmitting a control signal to each device based on the setting contents of steps S3905 to S3914 is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3914 performed every 2 msec is executed, or when the determination in step S3904 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3915, and whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 261.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the flow advances to step S3916 to determine whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3915 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3917. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased. After the power-off process is executed, the process loops endlessly.

  As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are unitized as the starting winning unit 401, and the starting winning unit 401 includes the first starting winning device 33a. And the front decoration part 403 which covers the front of the 2nd starting winning a prize device 33b collectively is provided. Therefore, the visibility of the game ball moving around the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is relatively lowered, and the game ball is the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device. It becomes difficult to know which one of the devices 33b entered the ball. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, even in the low ball entry state, the second start winning device 33b is relatively easily opened, and the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed even though the game ball is being shot. In the case where the time period during which the player is more likely to feel stress such as is not performed is reduced, the player only has to enter the game ball on the back side of the front decoration portion 403 to play the game. It is possible to proceed with the game as if the ball entered the first start winning device 33a or the second starting prize device 33b and the winning / winning lottery is received. In other words, even if the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a is low, if the game ball enters the second starting prize device 33b relatively easily, the winning / winning lottery will be consistently accepted. Therefore, there is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize which of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b the gaming ball entered. , Whether or not the game ball is easy to enter the first start winning device 33a is also not important. As a result, even if the game balls are less likely to enter the first start winning device 33a, it is possible to prevent the impression from being deteriorated.

  In addition, as a matter of course, if the blade member 37 is in the closed position, it is not possible to enter the game ball into the second starting winning device 33b. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the blade member 37 is in the closed position shifts his / her line of sight to the first starting prize device 33a and observes whether or not the game ball enters the first starting prize device 33a. Tend to be.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, the functional position, which is disposed in front of the blade member 37 and can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the open position, and the standby position, which can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the closed position. A pseudo sphere member 431 that can be displaced between positions is provided, and when the wing member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo wing member 431 is in the functional position, the game ball passes through the game area behind the pseudo wing member 431. It is configured to be possible.

  That is, even if it is not the timing to open the second start winning device 33b (displace the blade member 37 to the open position), the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position, as if the blade member 37 was moved. A pseudo vane opening mode is derived as if it were in the open position. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that a predetermined action related to the blade member 37 occurs from the visual recognition state in which the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed state. Therefore, if a player who is interested in opening the second starting prize device 33b recognizes that some action has occurred in the second starting prize device 33b that is in the closed state, the second starting prize device 33b. It is conceivable to redirect the line of sight to the second starting winning device 33b as if the device 33b had been opened. However, in reality, there may be a case where the pseudo blade is opened (the operation of only the pseudo blade member 431), and the pseudo blade opened mode is a mode in which the blade member 37 is in the open position. Therefore, with respect to the second starting winning device 33b, if the wing member 37 is in the open position, or if the pseudo wing opening mode is derived, just by glancing or entering the edge of the field of view. It is difficult to distinguish whether the blade member 37 is in the closed position or it is mistaken (for a moment) that the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position.

  As described above, the pseudo blade opening mode is only for making the blade member 37 appear to be opened, which makes it appear that the blade member 37 is opened. When there is no sign that the game ball has entered, the state in which the game ball of the second starting prize device 33b enters the ball does not always match the appearance of the second starting prize device 33b. When the pseudo blade opening mode is repeated to some extent, the game balls are constantly entering the second starting prize device 33b and the like, and the game is not delayed (the first starting prize device 33a and the second starting prize device). Unless the player is in a disadvantageous game due to the total number of game balls not entering the device 33b), it does not matter much whether the blade member 37 is opened. You can reach your feelings. As a result, even if the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning device 33a is reduced, it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the impression caused by the effect. It will be played more.

  Furthermore, by the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing when the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state (or the closed state). Therefore, the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, the advanced player who can perform a game such as launching the game ball only at the timing when the game ball can enter, and the beginner player It is possible to suppress the situation where the gap is widened.

  Further, by utilizing the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to perform an effect that is involved in opening and closing the blade member 37, or an effect that is simply lively regardless of opening and closing of the blade member 37. In addition, as the game progresses, the pseudo-blade opening mode becomes a part of the game scenery, accents and liveliness during the game, or rhythm (feeling lonely when it disappears) can be improved.

  Further, by using the pseudo blade member 431 to derive the pseudo blade opening mode, the pseudo blade opening mode can be made more realistic. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo blade opening means that imitates the aspect of the blade member 37 behind the blade member 37, but in this case, the pseudo blade opening means is arranged relatively rearward. However, there is a concern that it may be difficult to see even if the pseudo blade opening means is in the pseudo blade opening mode. In addition, the game ball may pass in front of the pseudo blade opening means in the pseudo blade opening mode. Due to these, there is a possibility that it is instantly recognized that the pseudo blade opening mode is pseudo. In this respect, by providing the pseudo blade member 431 in front of the blade member 37, the above-mentioned concern can be eliminated.

  Moreover, since the pseudo blade member 431 can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member 37 is kept in the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is simulated without inviting more game balls than necessary into the second starting winning device 33b. The manner in which the blade member 431 operates (the manner in which the whale moves the forelimbs, the manner in which the second start winning device 33b opens (subtly) opens, etc.) can be fully utilized for production and the like.

  In particular, when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to cover the front of the blade member 37 and be displaced from the standby position to the functional position. Has been done. Further, when the vane member 37 in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo vane member 431 is also configured to cover the front of the vane member 37 and be displaced from the functional position to the standby position. Has been done. Therefore, when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the blade member 37 is viewed from the front, and when the blade member 37 is in the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. Can be made the same as the front view of (the pseudo vane member 431 is visually recognized in both functional positions). Furthermore, since the blade member 37 in the middle of displacement is also covered by the pseudo blade member 431, it is difficult to understand the displacement of the blade member 37. Therefore, the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode can be further enhanced.

  Further, by adopting a configuration in which the front surface side of the blade member 37 is not directly exposed to the front, the front surface side of the blade member 37 does not need to be the same as the pseudo blade member 431, and the front surface of the blade member 37 is not required. For example, it is not necessary to perform a process such as drawing a figure (in this example, it is not necessary to form the shape of the forelimb of a whale). Therefore, the configuration of the blade member 37 can be simplified, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member 37, the figure or the like rubs against the pseudo blade member 431 to design It is possible to prevent the property from being deteriorated.

  Further, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to be rotatable, and inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425 connected to the blade member 37, the pseudo shaft connected to the pseudo blade member 431. 433 is inserted. Thereby, the rotation axis of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 can be made to extend on the same straight line. Therefore, the operation of the blade member 37 and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 can be relatively easily synchronized. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member 37 is displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member 37, so that the front of the blade member 37 is further moved. It can be surely covered. Therefore, the function and effect such as making the location of the blade member 37 difficult to understand are further exhibited.

  In addition, the blade member 37 is made of a colorless and transparent material, and the upper surface (guide surface) of the blade member 37 in the open position is located below the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the blade member 37 (it becomes difficult to confirm the operation and location of the blade member 37). Therefore, the operational effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further exhibited.

  By providing the front decoration portion 403, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity in the peripheral portions of the first start winning prize device 33a and the second starting prize winning device 33b. For this reason, if the player hits the game ball aiming at the front decoration portion 403, it should be a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that the player will enter either the first starting prize device 33a or the second starting prize device 33b. You can Further, more dynamic decoration and the like can be performed in the front decoration portion 403 that collectively covers the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b, and it is possible to improve the design.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the front decoration portion 403 includes the character display portion 441 that is shaped like a whale excluding the forelimbs, and the pseudo-feather member 431 is formed by imitating the forelimbs of the whale. The pseudo vane member 431 is displaced to the functional position so that the entire image of the whale appears. Therefore, while attracting the line of sight of the whale that moves the forelimbs, the visibility of the back side of the front decoration portion 403 is reduced, and the player's interest in how the game balls enter the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. Can be lowered. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the operational effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to the decrease in the ease with which the game balls enter the first start winning device 33a.

  Further, the front of the blade member 37 in the closed position is configured to be covered by the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403. For this reason, it becomes more difficult to determine whether the pseudo blade opening mode is only derived or whether the blade member 37 is really in the open position (whether or not the blade member 37 is in the closed position). By providing the pseudo blade member 431 and deriving an effect that the second starting winning device 33b may have been opened, the effect is further enhanced.

  Further, the tip portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403. This makes it easier to recognize that the pseudo blade member 431 has been displaced to the functional position. Therefore, while hiding the operation of the blade member 37 as much as possible, by positively appealing the operation of the pseudo blade member 431, you can enjoy the change in the visual state of the start winning unit 401, or you can enjoy the pseudo blade member. It is possible to make the effect (pseudo-blade effect processing or the like) executed using the operation of 431 easier to understand.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing control (starting winning device control process) of the blade member 37 of the second starting winning device 33b is executed by the main controller 261, and the opening / closing control of the pseudo blade member 431 (pseudo blade opening control process). , Pseudo blade effect processing) is configured to be executed by the sub control device 262. Therefore, the control load on main controller 261 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 261 releases the blade member 37 to the open position prior to the process of displacing the blade member 37 to the open position (step S2410 etc.) (step S2410). In addition to outputting S2307) to the sub control device 262, the sub control device 262 is configured to displace the dummy blade member 431 to the standby position when the opening confirmation command is received (step S4604). Therefore, when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the dummy blade member 431 is already in the functional position, so that the blade member 37 in the middle of displacement cannot be covered with the dummy blade member 431. It is possible to avoid such a situation.

  In addition, the pseudo blade member 431 has a larger front surface area than the blade member 37, the blade member 37 is in the open position, and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. The side portion on the standby position side of the pseudo blade member 431 is located closer to the closed position side than the side surface. Furthermore, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member 431 on the functional position side is closer to the side portion than the surface of the blade member 37 on the open position side. , Located on the open position side. That is, since the blade member 37 is controlled by the main controller 261 and the pseudo blade member 431 is controlled by the sub controller 262, the operation start timing of the blade member 37 and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member 431 are slightly different. There is a possibility of deviation. In this respect, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to be additionally covered on the operating direction side of the blade member 37 that can move first, so that even if the blade member 37 is displaced slightly ahead, the pseudo blade member 431 does not move. It will fit within the covered area. Therefore, it is easy to understand whether or not the blade member 37 is displaced, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the design due to the deviation between the operation of the blade member 37 and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431. can do.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the detection of the first starting prize switch 224a and the second starting prize switch 224b is performed, the corresponding holding lamp 46a or 46b is turned on and the decorative symbol display device is displayed. A hold icon 461 is displayed in the hold display area 462 of 42. Therefore, even if the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are not directly visually recognized, by visually recognizing the hold icon 461 or the like, the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b is played. It is possible to grasp (rather easy to grasp) that the ball has entered and that the right to win or lose the lottery has been obtained. Therefore, the chances of directly visually recognizing the starting winning devices 33a and 33b are reduced, and even if the winning rate to the first starting winning device 33a is relatively low, the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b can be recognized. If the overall ball entry rate is not low, put yourself in a situation where you do not care whether the game ball enters the first start prize device 33a or the second start prize device 33b. It is possible not to fall into a situation where the first start-winning prize device 33a is in sight. Therefore, it is possible to more surely suppress the situation in which the interest of the game is deteriorated due to the fact that the game ball does not easily enter the first start winning device 33a. On the other hand, even if it becomes slightly hard to see how the game balls enter the first start prize switch 224a and the second start prize switch 224b, whether or not the game ball has entered is firmly indicated by the hold icon 461 or the like. Since it can be confirmed that the player can feel secure.

  Further, in the covered area (inner area of the start winning unit 401) of which the front is covered by the front decoration portion 403 of the game area, a pseudo prize detection switch 445 capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided. Has been. In the present embodiment, when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 is different from the hold icon 461 (main hold icon 463) imitating the hold icon 461 (main hold icon 463). The pseudo hold icon 466 of the aspect is configured to be derivable. In addition, when the first start winning prize switch 224a or the second starting prize winning switch 224b is detected, before the main hold icon 463 corresponding to the detection is derived, the temporary hold icon has the same form as the pseudo hold icon 466. The hold icon 464 is configured to be derived in some cases. Therefore, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, it is possible to perform an effect such that the game ball that has entered the covering area (starting winning unit 401) may have entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of production opportunities and types of production, and to diversify the production. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode (production as to whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b), and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Further, the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are displayed as if the main hold icon 463 is blurred and are accompanied by a dynamic bubble display 467 that is displayed so as to overlap in front of it. Therefore, it is possible to reliably understand that the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are not the main hold icon 463. Therefore, for example, if the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are different from the real hold icon 463, they are different, but if they are in the same mode or in a mode that cannot be distinguished, a game is played. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a person thinks the pseudo holding icon 466 to be the real holding icon 463 and causes a feeling of distrust.

  Since the form of the main hold icon 463 is determined based on the content of the corresponding variable display, the form of the main hold icon 463 can be more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to further raise interest in the effect of whether the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 become the main hold icon 463.

  In addition, the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is electrically connected to the sub control device 262. Therefore, by reducing the information input to the main control device 261 and the number of components for inputting information to the main control device 261, the control load on the main control device 261 is reduced and the main control device 261 is controlled. It is possible to suppress fraud and the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected, the number of pending variable displays of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) is less than eight, That is, unless the detection by the start prize winning switches 224a, 224b is in a valid state as a trigger of the winning / winning lottery, the pseudo hold icon 466 corresponding to the detection by the pseudo prize detecting switch 445 is not newly displayed (step). See S4506). Therefore, in a state in which the provisional hold icon 464 and the main hold icon 463 should not be displayed, the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed, and thus the situation in which the pseudo hold icon 466 is clearly recognized. It can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the enjoyment is deteriorated due to the unintentional derivation of the pseudo-holding icon 466.

  Further, in the covered area of the game area, which is covered in front by the front decoration portion 403, a guide table for guiding the game ball to the pseudo prize detection switch 445 at a position downstream of the second start winning device 33b. 446 is provided. Further, a guide nail 448 that changes the traveling direction of the game ball (in this example, guides it toward the guide base 446) is provided at a position adjacent to and below the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position.

  For example, if the game ball enters the covered area and the blade member 37 is at the open position, the game ball reaches the guide point guided by the blade member 37 to the ball receiving portion 405 of the second starting winning device 33b. Also, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position, the game ball is naturally not guided by the blade member 37 but flows down the game area as it is and is discharged to the outside of the covering area. At this time, if the trajectory of the game sphere incident on the covered area and the trajectory after the game sphere is discharged from the covered area extend substantially in a straight line, the game sphere incident on the covered area is the first start prize. Without entering the device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, it is immediately grasped as being discharged from the covered area.

  In this respect, since the guide base 446 and the guide nail 448 are provided as described above, the advancing direction of the game ball changes in the covered area, and the advancing speed of the game ball is delayed. It becomes difficult to follow the whereabouts of the game ball after entering. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the covered area to an easily visible place, and the game ball is the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device. More situations can be created that may or may not have entered the device 33b.

  In particular, by visually observing the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, it is possible to know whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting prize device 33a or the second starting prize device 33b, and also the hold. Since a variety of effects related to it are also performed, rather than visually checking the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b to check whether or not the game ball has entered, holding of the decorative symbol display device 42 It is possible to make it easier to shift to a game property such as confirming a ball to the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b with the icon 461. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to concentrate on the effect or accumulating stress by visually recognizing that the game ball does not easily enter the first start winning device 33a.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

  (A; Shape, Design, etc. of Front Decoration Unit) In the above embodiment, the front decoration unit 403 is configured in a substantially disc shape. Can be changed appropriately. For example, the part that covers the first starting prize device 33a and the part that covers the second starting prize device 33b may be configured as separate bodies (separate bodies may be combined. However, it may be arranged adjacent to those configured separately). In addition, for example, a "rock reef" may be drawn on the front decoration portion 403, and a "fish school" may be drawn on the pseudo blade member 431. The design of the front decorative portion 403 and the design of the pseudo blade member 431 may be completely unrelated.

  Furthermore, for example, the front decoration section 403 may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning or losing lottery, etc.). In addition, the front decoration portion 403 is instructed that the first start winning prize device 33a and the second starting prize winning device 33b are present, and the first starting prize winning device 33a and the second starting prize winning device 33b. It is also possible to provide a display for teaching the position of, or teaching that the target position of the game ball is here. In other words, since the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are unitized and become a little difficult to understand, there is concern that the player may be confused as to where to hit the game ball. By displaying, such concern can be suppressed. Further, when it is difficult to understand only by the display guidance in the front decoration portion 403, guidance display is also performed in other parts (for example, a display in which the normal screen is not changed from the demo display screen in the decorative pattern display device 42). When the display is switched to, a display for guiding the target position of the game ball is displayed on the display screen). In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the front decoration portion 403 is made of a transparent or translucent resin so that the front decoration portion 403 is configured to have transparency. A plurality of slits or holes may be formed to provide transparency.

  Further, in the front decoration portion 403 (character display portion 441), an indicator portion is provided to serve as a criterion for determining whether the distance between the life nails 406 provided in a pair on the left and right is wide or narrow. You may comprise. For example, as shown in FIG. 50, of the whales that are the character display portion 441, the two divided tip portions of the tail 701 located near the life nail 406 are each sharpened, and the tip portions are a pair of life nails, respectively. You may comprise so that it may be arrange | positioned just under 406. In this case, the part of the tail 701 of the whale, where the distance between the tip parts is almost the same as the distance between the life nails 406, constitutes the index part.

  In this case, by comparing the pair of right and left life nails 406 and the tail 701 of the whale, it is possible to accurately and quickly determine whether the distance between the life nails 406 is wide or narrow. .. Therefore, the proper position of the life nail 406 (the head of the life nail 406) can be instantly grasped, and it is possible to relatively judge whether or not the life nail 406 needs maintenance, or the player can When the distance between the life nails 406 is narrower than that of the tail 701 of the whale, it is possible to avoid the game so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. As a result, the distance between the life nails 406 can be made as constant as possible, and it is possible to reduce the variation of the pachinko machines 10 with respect to the ease with which the game balls enter the first start prize winning apparatus 33a. .. In particular, since the indicator portion (whale tail 701) is provided in the front decoration portion 403, it is close to the tip portion (head portion) of the life nail 406, so that the inclination of the life nail 406 can be grasped more reliably. can do.

  The mode of the index portion is not particularly limited, and for example, an index portion having the same width as that between the pair of life nails 406 may be provided immediately below the pair of life nails 406, or each life portion 406 may be provided. Immediately below the nails 406, index portions may be provided so as to indicate the positions of the respective game nails 406, or the indicator portions may be formed by the shape of the front decoration portion 403 instead of forming the indicator portions by the character display portion 441 or the like. It may be configured as a unit. Further, the dummy blade member 431 and the blade member 37 may be provided with an index portion.

  The shape and the like of the base plate 402 of the starting winning unit 401 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the slider 411 may be omitted. Further, the ball receiving portion 405 can be configured separately from the front decoration portion 403.

  (B; Target to be Covered by Front Decoration Unit) In the above-described embodiment, the front decoration unit 403 is configured to collectively cover the front of the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b. It may be configured so as to cover the front of only the prize, or may be configured to cover other prize winning devices (variable prize winning device 32) and the like. In the above-described embodiment, the first starting prize winning device 33a and the second starting prize winning device 33b are arranged vertically, but the arrangement is not particularly limited, and for example, it is configured to be arranged left and right. You may. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first start winning device 33a is configured such that the game ball can be entered at all times, and the second starting prize device 33b is in the open state where the game ball can enter and incapable of entering. Although it is configured to change the state to the closed state, for example, both may be able to enter the game ball at all times, or both may be changed to the open state and the closed state.

  In addition, the front decoration portion 403 may be configured to cover the front and upper portions of the pair of left and right life nails 406. In this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize how the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a. Therefore, the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting prize device 33a is based on various matters (such as the display of the hold icon 461) derived as a result of the game ball entering the first starting prize device 33a. You can ask them to go. As a result, it is possible to further promote a game in which the pace of entering the game balls into the first start winning device 33a is not so particular. In the case of adopting the configuration, in order to avoid the interference between the life nail 406 and the front decoration portion 403, the protrusion length of the life nail 406 from the front surface of the game board 30 is shortened or the front decoration portion 403 is provided. On the other hand, a nail hole for inserting the life nail 406 may be formed.

  (C; Operation of pseudo blade member) In the above embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the open position or in the middle of the displacement, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to cover the front side thereof. The blade member 37 may be in the open position while the pseudo blade member 431 may be in the standby position.

  Furthermore, the effect using the pseudo blade member 431, the trigger for operating the pseudo blade member 431, and the like are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42, a display requesting that the effect button 125 be operated at the timing of whether the reach state is generated is derived, and when the effect button 125 is operated. , The pseudo blade member 431 operates according to the content of the variable display (for example, when the reach state is not transitioned, by operating the effect button 125, the pseudo blade member 431 operates smaller each time, however much. The pseudo blade member 431 is configured not to reach the functional position even when operated, and when shifting to the reach state, the pseudo blade member 431 is operated once or based on a plurality of predetermined operations of the effect button 125. The member 431 may be displaced to the functional position). However, the blade member 37 does not operate in accordance with the effect using the pseudo blade member 431, and is maintained in the closed position unless it is won in the ball entry support lottery.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration for operating the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 of the second starting winning device 33b is not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are operated by the motor, but they may be operated by using another driving means such as a solenoid. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the motor is provided in a one-to-one relationship with the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 provided as a pair. May be configured to operate. When the pseudo side motors 432 are provided in a one-to-one relationship with the pseudo blade members 431 as in the above-described embodiment, only one of the pair of pseudo blade members 431 is used in the production using the pseudo blade members 431. It is also possible to move it and to perform separate actions on the left and right.

  Further, although the area of the front surface of the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to be larger than the area of the front surface of the blade member 37, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to substantially cover the front of the blade member 37. However, for example, they may have substantially the same area (same shape in front view). When the upper side of the dummy blade member 431 in the functional position is above (on the standby position side / closed position side) the upper surface of the blade member 37 in the open position as in the above embodiment, Even if the blade member 37 controlled by the control device 261 starts displacement to the closed position side prior to the pseudo blade member 431, the blade member 37 is exposed in a region not covered by the pseudo blade member 431 in front. In addition to being able to prevent such a situation, in general, the player is positioned above the position where the starting winning unit 401 is provided, and the starting winning unit 401 in such a state is visually recognized (looking from above. In this case, the blade member 37 can be hidden by the pseudo blade member 431 as much as possible.

  In the above embodiment, a predetermined panel may be interposed between the pseudo blade member 431 and the blade member 37, or the pseudo blade member 431 may be provided in front of the front decorative portion 403. In this case, the game ball collides against the step (upper side of the pseudo blade member 431) formed between the rear surface of the front decorative portion 403 and the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position, and is thrown away. The situation can be avoided.

  (D; Material of pseudo blade member) In the above embodiment, the blade member 37 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. It may be configured to be the same as the aspect of the front surface of 431 (corresponding to the above-described embodiment, a visual aspect imitating the forelimb of a whale). In this case, when the blade member 37 is set to the open position, the whale picture is completed and the blade member 37 is in the open position without displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position. The mode of the starting winning unit 401 when 431 is in the standby position and the mode of the starting winning unit 401 when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position can be made substantially the same. it can.

  However, when such a configuration is adopted, the front and rear positions of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are displaced from each other even if they have the same shape in front view. Therefore, by adopting the configuration in which the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced to the functional position when the blade member 37 is in the open position as in the above-described embodiment, the blade member 37 is not in the open position. However, both of the front view modes can be the front mode of the same pseudo blade member 431, and the pseudo blade opening mode can be more realistic. Note that, for example, by setting the color of the blade member 37 to be the same as the color of the base plate 402, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the location of the blade member 37 as much as possible.

  (E; Shape of pseudo vane member) In the above-described embodiment, the tip portion of the pseudo vane member 431 in the functional position is arranged outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403. You may comprise so that it may fit in an inner peripheral side rather than a peripheral edge. In particular, when the tip edge of the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced along the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403, it is possible to improve the design. Even when the tip portion of the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to fit inside the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403, the pseudo blade displaced to the functional position as in the above embodiment. The member 431 is configured to project to a position behind the general portion 442, which has a higher transparency than the character display portion 441 in the front decoration portion 403. It is possible to make it easier to confirm the pseudo blade member 431 displaced to the functional position, as compared with the case where the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced only behind the lower portion. Further, the three-dimensional shape of the pseudo blade member 431 is not limited to the plate shape, and for example, a substantially square frame shape that opens in the displacement direction of the pseudo blade member 431 and can house the blade member 37 inside, It may be configured such that a part of the square frame is cut out to have a substantially U-shaped cross section.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48, a pressing recess 711 that opens forward and downward is provided in the lower part of the front surface side of the blade member 37, and a pressing recess 711 that can be inserted into the pressing recess 711 is provided on the rear surface side of the pseudo blade member 431. The projecting portion 712 may be provided. In this case, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the blade member 37 mainly drives (the blade-side motor 421 first, or only the blade-side motor 421) to drive (pseudo blade). Even if the operation of the member 431 is slightly delayed, the pseudo blade member 431 is pressed by the blade member 37 and is displaced from the standby position to the functional position.

  On the other hand, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is mainly driven (the pseudo side motor 432 first or only the pseudo side motor 432) to drive the (blade member). Even if the operation of 37 is slightly delayed, the blade member 37 is pressed by the pseudo blade member 431 and displaced from the open position to the closed position. As described above, by providing the pressing concave portion 711 and the pressing convex portion 712, it is possible to avoid the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 from operating independently, and to separate the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431. , Can be moved in synchronization as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member 37 displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 displaced to the functional position are deviated from each other so that the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, or only the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced. It is possible to more surely avoid a situation in which it becomes easy to understand whether or not it is merely displaced to the functional position.

  Further, the pseudo blade member 431 of FIG. 48 is arranged with the pressing convex portion 712 as close to the axial center side of the pseudo blade member 431 as possible, so that when the pseudo blade member 431 is independently displaced to the functional position, the game is played. Due to the collision of the ball with the pressing convex portion 712, the game ball is prevented from being irregularly blown off or the pressing convex portion 712 is damaged. However, the formation position of the pressing convex portion 712 is not particularly limited, and for example, the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is driven and the blade member 37 in the open position is pushed to be displaced to the closed position. In the above, by disposing the pressing convex portion 712 as far as possible from the axial center of the pseudo blade member 431, it is possible to minimize the force required to push the blade member 37 in the open position to displace it to the closed position. it can.

  Even when the pressing concave portion 711 and the pressing convex portion 712 are provided, from the state where the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the blade member 37 is kept in the closed position and only the pseudo blade member 431 is moved to the functional position side. It can be displaced. Further, by providing the pressing convex portion 712 on the rotation axis side of the pseudo blade member 431 as much as possible, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the visibility of the game ball moving behind the semitransparent pseudo blade member 431 as much as possible. In addition, in this example of the aspect, the upper surface of the pressing concave portion 711 constitutes the blade-side pressing portion, and the pressing convex portion 712 constitutes the pseudo-side pressing portion.

  In the above-described embodiment, the blade member 37 is configured to fit inside the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403, but at least the tip end portion of the blade member 37 at the open position is the front decorative portion. You may comprise so that it may be located outside the outer periphery of 403. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pseudo vane member 431 is configured to cover the front of the entire vane member 37. However, for example, the tip end portion of the vane member 37 is ahead of the tip end portion of the pseudo vane member 431. It is also possible to adopt a configuration such that it cannot be partially covered, such as protruding in the (centrifugal direction of the rotating shaft). That is, for example, a configuration in which the tip end portion of the blade member 37 in the open position protrudes to the outer peripheral side from the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403 and also protrudes from the tip end portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position. When adopted, the tip of the blade member 37 is exposed to the front, and it becomes easy to confirm that the blade member 37 is in the open position.

  (F; Configuration in which pseudo blade member is omitted) In the above embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 that can cover the front of the blade member 37 is provided, but the pseudo blade member 431 can be omitted. Further, in the case where the pseudo blade member 431 is omitted, in order to make it difficult to know whether the blade member 37 is in the open position or the closed position, the front decoration portion 403 is located in front of the blade member 37 in the open position. Corresponding to the position, the character display unit 441 is configured so that the front limbs of the whale are also drawn, and the front (semitransparent) display of the front limbs of the whale covers the front of the blade member 37 in the open position. You may comprise.

  The blade member 37 in the closed position may be configured such that the front thereof is covered with the body of the whale or the like, as in the above embodiment. Further, in the present example, the display of the forelimbs of the whale constitutes the covering means at the time of opening (covering portion at the time of opening), and the display of the body of the whale constitutes the covering means at the time of covering (covering portion at the closing time). By the way, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position constitutes the opening covering means, and the display of the body of the whale (and the pseudo blade member 431 in the standby position) constitutes the closing covering means.

  (G; Modified Example of Pseudo Blade Opening Mode) Further, in place of or in addition to the pseudo blade opening mode in which the blade member 37 by the pseudo blade member 431 exists in the open position, another pseudo blade opening is provided. It is also possible to provide another pseudo blade opening means from which the aspect can be derived.

  (G-1; Light guide plate) For example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the front decoration portion 403, light is incident from the side, so that a mode imitating the front limb of a whale appears in the light incident portion. It may be configured as follows. More specifically, the area of the front decoration portion 403 surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50A (hereinafter referred to as “light emitting portion 721”) is incident on the front decoration portion 403 from the side. Processing is performed so that the reflected angle of the reflected light is different from that of the other portions (a light guide plate that is not totally reflected in the front decorative portion 403 and is irradiated forward). In the example of this mode, the light emitting unit 721 constitutes a pseudo open object.

  Further, light is made incident on the light emitting portion 721 from a portion corresponding to the root of the front leg of the whale. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, a cylindrical shaft support portion 724 protruding from the front surface of the blade member 722 is provided in front of the portion of the blade member 722 connected to the blade shaft 723. The shaft support part 724 is inserted into a bearing part 438 (see FIG. 45 (b)) formed in a circular concave shape at the position corresponding to the root of the front leg of the whale on the rear surface side of the front decoration part 403, and is pivotally supported. .

  The blade shaft 723 has a cylindrical shape, and a core rod 726 including a dummy light source 725 is inserted into a part of the outer peripheral surface of the front (front) end portion of the blade shaft 723. The core rod 726 also has a cylindrical shape, and the wiring for the dummy light source 725 is inserted inside the core rod 726. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the core rod 726 is configured to project forward of the blade shaft 723 and be housed inside the shaft support portion 724 of the blade member 722. That is, the dummy light source 725 is located on the inner peripheral side of the bearing portion 438 of the front decoration portion 403.

  Further, the core rod 726 is also provided with a gear 727 connected to a motor (not shown) so as to be rotatable. In this mode example, the core rod 726 is located at a position where the dummy light source 725 faces the light emitting unit 721 (see FIG. 50B) provided at the same position as the blade member 722 which is in the open position when viewed from the front. In a front view, the dummy light source 725 faces a light emitting unit 721 (see FIG. 50 (c)) provided at the same position as the blade member 722 at an intermediate position between the open position and the closed position. It is configured so that it can be displaced between. In the state of FIG. 50A, the dummy light source 725 is turned off.

  Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the same condition as the condition for independently displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position in the above embodiment is satisfied), the blade member 722 to be opened and closed is imitated. As shown in FIG. 50 (c), after the light emitting section 721 imitating the blade member 722 in the middle of opening is made to emit light, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the light emitting section 721 imitating the blade member 722 in the open position. 50, and after a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the light emitting portion 721 simulating the closing blade member 722 is caused to emit light, and then the dummy light source 725 is turned off.

  Even when the above-mentioned configuration is adopted, the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived. In addition, since the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived in the front decoration portion 403, for example, the pseudo blade opening mode can be seen compared to the case where the pseudo blade opening mode is derived at a position rearward of the blade member 722. The ease can be improved.

  When the blade member 722 operates, the light emitting section 721 may be configured to be synchronized as much as possible to emit light. In this case, the mode in which the blade member 722 is displaced to the open position and the pseudo blade opening mode can be made as close as possible. Further, instead of rotating the dummy light source 725, a plurality of dummy light sources capable of emitting light from the respective light emitting units 721 may be provided.

  (G-2; transmission hole) Further, for example, in the base plate 402 for attaching the starting winning unit 401 to the game board 30, by making light incident from the rear side, the blade member 37 is imitated at the portion where light is incident. It may be configured such that the above-mentioned aspect emerges. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (c), the main body of the blade member 731 is made of an opaque resin, and a rectangular opening is formed on the front surface side. The prism plate 732 is fitted there. Further, a light source is built in the blade member 731.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), in the base plate 734, in a front view, the position where the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 is in the open position and the intermediate position between the open position and the closed position. Corresponding to the portion of the blade member 731 on which the prism plate 732 is located, a transmission hole having the same shape as the prism plate 732 is formed, and the dummy prism plate 735 is fitted therein. Further, behind each of the dummy prism plates 735, a dummy light source for causing each of the dummy prism plates 735 to emit light is installed. In the example of this aspect, the prism plate 732 capable of emitting light constitutes a light emitting means, and the pseudo prism plate 735 constitutes a pseudo open object.

  In this example of the aspect, when the blade member 731 is located at a position other than the closed position, the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 emits light. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the same condition as the condition for independently displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position in the above embodiment is satisfied), the blade member 731 to be opened and closed is imitated. , The pseudo prism plate 735 simulating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the open state is made to emit light, and then the pseudo prism plate 735 simulating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the open position is made to emit light for a predetermined time. After that, the pseudo prism plate 735 that imitates the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 that is being closed is caused to emit light, and then the pseudo light source is turned off.

  Even when the above-mentioned configuration is adopted, the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived. Further, in the rear of the blade member 731 (base plate 734), the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived with a relatively simple configuration. Further, in the present mode example, the prism plate 732 that can derive the mode in which the blade member 731 emits light is provided, and the pseudo blade open mode imitates the light mode of the prism plate 732. In this way, the blade member 731 has a visible state in which the blade member 731 is emitting light, and thus the blade member 731 is in the open position and the pseudo blade opening mode using the pseudo prism plate 735 is used. It is possible to tie it up more strongly (confusing which is the intuitive judgment of a glance). Further, it is possible to achieve simplification of the configuration (shape) for deriving the pseudo blade open mode (a sufficiently pseudo mode by imitating only the prism plate 732 instead of the entire blade member 731).

  The timing of deriving the pseudo blade opening mode is not particularly limited, and may be configured to be regularly (for example, almost always) derived. In addition, for example, as the opening pattern of the second starting winning device 33b, a short open for a short time in an open state and a long open for a long open time are set. In order to make the operation of the blade member 37 relatively incomprehensible by deriving the blade opening mode, prohibiting the derivation of the pseudo blade opening mode in the case of long opening so that the operation of the blade member 37 becomes relatively easy to understand. You may comprise. However, in the configuration in which the operation of the blade member 37 is easier to understand when the pseudo blade member 431 is operated together with the blade member 37 as in the above-described embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 is used similarly to the pseudo blade opening mode. It will be operated together with the blade member 37. In addition, it may be difficult to understand the long opening.

  (H; Movable Covering Means) In the above-described embodiment, a transparent movable covering member (movable covering means) such as the pseudo blade member 431 is provided so as to cover the front of the blade member 37. However, by the movable covering accessory, a peripheral portion of a predetermined prize winning device, particularly, a game ball moving (around the winning opening) or a guide means for guiding the game ball to the predetermined winning device (the slider of the above embodiment). 411, a game nail, etc. The vane member 37 of the above-described embodiment is configured so as to be able to cover the front of the peripheral part (the game ball that moves) of the corresponding guide means). Good. The movable covering accessory may be configured to be displaceable between a functional position for covering the front of the covering target and a standby position for exposing the covering target forward.

  In this case, when the movable covering accessory is in the functional position, how the game sphere covers the covered object covered with the movable covering accessory, even though the movable covering means has transparency. Whether it was involved, that is, if the start winning device 33a, 33b is covered, whether the game ball has entered, or if the guide means is covered, the game ball is guided by the guide means. The visibility is relatively low regarding whether or not the vehicle is guided. In particular, when the movable covering accessory is in operation or immediately after the operation, the player's line of sight is directed toward the movable covering accessory, which is more likely to occur. Therefore, a situation occurs in which the player loses sight of the game ball for a moment even if he or she is following the game ball, or the player tries to grasp the trend of the game ball by another method (for example, display of the hold icon 461 on the decorative symbol display device 42). It may be possible to add a new effect (pseudo-holding icon 466, etc.) to it and obtain an opportunity to add it. As a result, it is possible to generate more dramatic developments and effects with respect to the entry (starting winning) of the gaming balls into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Further, when adopting such a configuration, as in the above-described embodiment, a game in which the game area such as the guide nail 448 is moved to a position that is directly below the movable covering accessory (pseudo vane member 431) in the functional position. It is desirable to provide a course changing means for changing the traveling direction of the sphere.

  When such a configuration is adopted, it is easy to visually recognize the game ball that has entered the region (specific cover region) covered by the movable cover accessory (pseudo vane member 431) in the functional position, and the outside from the specific cover region. It may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the game ball that has jumped out to the place, and the game ball may enter the starting winning device (second starting winning device 33b) or be guided by the guide means (blade member 37). You can create more situations where you may or may not know. As a result, when performing an effect that teaches or suggests what happened to the game ball that has entered the specific coverage area, such effect can be made more effective.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (b), in the area covered by the movable covering accessory in the functional position (specific covering area), the guide nail 448 is set so as to further increase the driving amount to the game board 30. It may be configured to be arranged. In addition, a game ball guided by the guide means (for example, a game ball moving on the upper surface of the blade member 37 in the open position as in the above embodiment), or a game after being guided by the guide means. At least a portion of the ball (e.g., a game ball that bounces and bounces over the upper side of the guide nail 448) (better overall) is configured to be covered by the movable covering accessory in the functional position. Is desirable.

  Further, when the object covered with the movable covering accessory in the functional position is the guide means, the front of the peripheral portion of the starting winning device (the second starting winning device 33b) to which the game ball is guided by the guiding device. It is desirable to provide a front decoration part 403 (a general part of the front covering means) for covering the. Further, it is desirable that the front decoration portion 403 and the movable covering accessory (pseudo-blade member 431) in the functional position are partially continuous or close to each other in a front view, Furthermore, the game ball guided by the guide means covered in the front by the movable cover role or the game ball whose course has been changed by the route change means moves forward in the movable cover role in the functional position. It is configured so that it can be moved to a region (generally covered region) that is covered by the front decorative portion 403 without exposing (almost) to an uncovered region (the exposure time during movement is as short as possible). Is desirable.

  In addition, by providing a course changing means (for example, a guide stand 446) also in a region (generally covered region) that is covered by the front decoration portion 403, the behavior of the game ball in the general covered region and the specific covered region can be better understood. It becomes difficult to do so, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the game balls that have entered these covered areas and the game balls that have been discharged from the covered areas. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which the game ball that has entered the covered area may have entered the starting winning device (second starting winning device 33b) or may not have entered. Further, by providing the pseudo winning detection switch 445 in a region (generally covered region) that is covered by the front decorative portion 403, it is possible to improve game play and performance.

(I; Mode of pseudo-hold icon)
(I-1) In the above embodiment, the forms of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 or the second starting winning switch 224b, the floating ring type pseudo holding icon 466 or the temporary holding icon 464 is a decorative symbol display device. At 42, a display that appears at a position to the right of the hold display area 462 and moves (rolls) toward the left hold display area 462 is started. Then, in the case of the detection of the second start winning award switch 224b, when the temporary holding icon 464 reaches the specified position of the holding display area 462 and stops, the display mode as the main holding icon 463 is switched to, and the pseudo winning detection is performed. When the switch 445 is detected, the pseudo hold icon 466 does not stop even when it reaches the specified position of the hold display area 462, and a display disappears outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 as it is. It may be configured as follows.

  The hold icon 463 may have a predetermined movement. For example, it may be configured to perform an action such that the character configuring the hold icon 463 shakes his / her hand, changes his / her facial expression, etc. and does not come out of the hold display area 462. In addition, when the pseudo hold icon 466 itself is operating, the temporary hold icon 464 is switched to the main hold icon 463 by displaying the main hold icon 463 so that the movement is linked. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize. However, when the temporary holding icon 464, the pseudo holding icon 466, and the main holding icon 463 are differentiated based only on the size of the operation, there is a concern that the difference may be difficult to understand depending on the degree thereof. It is desirable to differentiate by changing the shape, pattern, hue, and other aspects.

  In addition, from the viewpoint of enjoying the effect of whether or not the start winning is performed using the pseudo winning detection switch 445, at least one starting winning device (second winning prize device) in the game area where the front is covered by the front decorative portion 403 (second It suffices that the starting winning device 33b) and the pseudo winning detection switch 445 are present, and other configurations arranged in such a region, a configuration in which the starting winning device (second starting winning device 33b) is opened and closed, and the like. Can be omitted.

  (I-2) Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, a snowman 751 is adopted as the hold icon, and the hold display area 462 of the hold display area 462 is detected based on the detection of the pseudo prize detection switch 445 or the second starting prize switch 224b. A display such as snow falling from above is started, and a pseudo hold icon or a snowman 752 being created as a temporary hold icon is displayed at a predetermined position in the hold display area 462, and is gradually completed. It may be configured.

  Furthermore, for example, the pseudo-hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464, as well as the additional display displayed in front of the pseudo-hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464, the motif of the hold icon 461 set for each model. It can be changed as appropriate. For example, additional display such as a stage curtain, additional display during work (for example, a worker is working by installing a work scaffold around the pseudo hold icon 466) is performed. It may be that. It should be noted that it is possible to omit the additional display such as the bubble display 467.

  By adopting these configurations, the impression that the mode of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 is not fixed, and that the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 may be further changed, is strongly felt. Can be given. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a trouble (such as a pending display, the variable display is not started or the pending disappeared) caused by misunderstanding the pseudo pending icon 466 or the temporary pending icon 464 as the main pending icon 463. can do.

  (J; prize history) Further, for example, the detection history of the first start prize switch 224a (the time of each detection), the detection history of the second start prize detection switch (the time of each detection), and the detection of the pseudo prize detection switch. It is also possible to provide a detection history storage unit capable of storing a history (time of each detection) and output the storage information of the detection history storage unit. For example, the detection history storage unit is provided in the sub control device 262 or a control device electrically connected to the sub control device 262, and when a predetermined operation is performed by a person involved in the hall, the sub control device 262. May read the storage information of the detection history storage means and display it on the decorative pattern display device 42. Further, the same information as the information stored in the detection history storage means may be output to the hall computer of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

  In this case, for example, if a player mistakes the pseudo-holding icon 466 for the main holding icon 463, and a trouble should occur, the data for explaining the situation will be surely obtained, and the trouble will be confused. It is possible to avoid such a situation as to end up.

  (K; Erase Pseudo Hold Icon) The conditions for deleting the pseudo hold icon 466 in the above embodiment are not particularly limited. For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the first start winning prize switch 224a or the second starting prize winning switch 224b is detected in the state where the pseudo holding icon 466 is displayed, instead of the pseudo holding icon 466, a temporary The hold icon 464 or the main hold icon 463 is configured to be displayed, but even if the detection of the first start prize switch 224a or the second start prize switch 224b is performed (the number of pseudo hold icons 466 is taken into consideration. However, the pseudo hold icon 466 may be continuously displayed (when the hold upper limit is not reached).

  Further, the pseudo hold icon 466 is configured to be displayed even when no variable display is held, or the pseudo hold icon 466 is not erased even if the holding shift process is performed only once. You may. In this case, a situation may occur in which only the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed in the hold display area 462. Therefore, in response to this, the temporary hold icon 464 remains and the corresponding variable display is started. Configure so that there are cases where it reaches. Furthermore, the effect when the timing of the start of the variable display is reached with the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 (for example, if the bubble display 467 becomes large and then disappears, does the hold icon 461 remain? It is desirable to perform an effect such as whether or not the main hold icon 463 is displayed.

  Further, the number of hold icons 461 (main hold icon 463, provisional hold icon 464) displayed at once in the hold display area 462 of the decorative pattern display device 42 and the pseudo hold icon 466 is the upper limit of variable display hold. The number may exceed (8 in the above embodiment). In addition, the pseudo hold icon 466 is erased, the temporary hold icon 464 is changed to the main hold icon 463, the change is prompted, or an effect accompanied by the change is derived based on a predetermined operation by the player. It may be configured to be performed.

  (L; Hold icon) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured not to teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting prize device 33b is the variable display based on the entered ball. However, for example, there may be a mode in which the hold icon 461 has information as to which of the first variable display and the second variable display, or there may be such a mode (a predetermined mode). When a predetermined condition such as winning the lottery is satisfied, or when a predetermined input operation is performed by the player, or when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the input operation is performed, the mode is derived. May be configured).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to display a maximum of eight hold icons 461, but for example, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is held in total of five or more in total. Even if it is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured such that only four hold icons 461 are displayed at the maximum. Further, for example, when the hold icon 461 can be displayed in the same number as the upper limit of the number of variable displays (8 in the above example), or when the pseudo hold icon 466 is included, a larger number can be displayed. In this case, in order to reduce the display space (holding display area 462) of the holding icon 461, for example, the four holding icons 461 that are consumed first are displayed larger than the holding icons 461 that are consumed later. You may comprise. Further, the mode of the hold icon 461 that is consumed later may be configured to be a simplified mode in which the number of holds can be grasped.

  (M; Pseudo winning detection switch) In the above embodiment, the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is provided on the downstream side of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. It may be provided on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, or may be provided on the downstream side of one of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b and on the other upstream side. When the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is located upstream of the first start prize device 33a and the second start prize device 33b, the game ball detected by the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is the first start prize device 33a and the second start prize device 33a. It may be configured to be able to enter the 2 start winning a prize device 33b, or it is not possible to enter a ball (for example, a game ball that has passed through the pseudo prize detecting switch 445 becomes the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b). The player is guided to a place where he / she does not enter the ball, or the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is installed in the winning opening provided in the covering area or the out opening, or the gaming ball entering the winning opening or the out opening It may be configured to also function as a detection switch for detection). In particular, when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is installed in the winning opening provided in the covering area or the outlet, the game ball that has entered the starting winning unit 401 has won the starting winning devices 33a, 33b. It becomes more difficult to understand whether or not.

  (N; Movable Front Decoration Part) In the above-mentioned embodiment, the front decoration part 403 is provided so as not to be relatively displaceable with respect to the game board 30, but may be provided so as to be relatively displaceable. For example, as shown in FIG. 52, a rotation shaft 762 may be attached to the rear surface side of the front decoration portion 761 and the rotation shaft 762 may be rotatable by a motor 763 as a decoration driving unit. Further, the motor 763 may be configured to be driven based on the detection of the first start prize winning switch 224a or the second start prize winning switch 224b.

  In this case, the operation of the front decoration unit 761 can detect the entry of the game ball into the first start winning prize device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, so that the first starting prize device 33a or the second starting prize device. Even if the player does not confirm that the game ball directly enters the device 33b, the game can be proceeded with a relatively sense of security. As a result, the attention can be paid by the effect or the like that teaches the result of the win / loss lottery.

  Further, for example, regardless of which of the first start prize winning switch 224a and the second start prize winning switch 224b is detected, the front decoration portion 761 may be configured to be displaceable in the same manner. Further, the motor 763 may be configured to be driven even when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected and the pseudo holding icon 466 is displayed. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is immediately recognized that the pseudo hold icon 466 is not the temporary hold icon 464 (main hold icon 463) depending on the operation mode of the front decoration unit 761.

  Further, in the rotary shaft 762 of FIG. 52, a portion attached to the front decoration portion 761 and a portion attached with a gear 766 meshed with the pinion 765 attached to the drive shaft 764 of the motor 763 serve as elastic means. They are connected by a coil spring 767. Therefore, the front decoration portion 761 is configured to be displaceable based on the contact of the game ball with the front decoration portion 761 even when the motor 763 is not driven.

  Therefore, it is possible to add interest to the operation of the front decoration portion 761. Furthermore, since the front decoration part 761 is displaced only by the collision of the game ball with the front decoration part 761, it is almost always the case that the game ball has entered the starting winning device 33a, 33b for a beginner player. You can have a sense of anticipation.

  It is to be noted that the structure in which the front decoration portion 761 is displaceable by the motor 763 and displaceable by the collision of the game ball without driving the motor 763 is not particularly limited. For example, in the non-driving state of the motor 763, the link mechanism (pinion 765 and gear 766) for interlocking the motor 763 and the front decoration portion 761 is not engaged, and in the non-driving state of the motor 763, the front decoration is The part 761 may be configured to be supported by an elastic body. In order to reduce the load on the coil spring 767, it is desirable to provide, for example, a portion of the rotating shaft 762 that is attached to the front decoration portion 761 or a bearing portion that supports the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 761.

  Further, for example, the panel is installed so as to abut or come close to the rear surface of the front decoration part 761 so that the other structure is not affected even if the front decoration part 761 operates (the bearing part 438 on the panel). Etc. are desirable). Furthermore, a plurality of front decoration parts are provided so as to be overlapped so that different operations can be performed (for example, different pictures are drawn for each front decoration part, and the relative position is changed, so It may be configured so that the pattern that can be seen also changes. For example, when there is a front decoration part that always operates, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize the behavior of the game ball moving behind it. Further, for example, it is possible to suggest and teach predetermined information by combining a plurality of positions of the front decoration portion.

  (O; prize effect sound) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, for example, a first prize effect sound corresponding to the detection of the first start prize switch 224a and a first prize effect sound corresponding to the detection of the second start prize switch 224b. The second winning effect sound, the first winning effect sound, and the confusion winning effect sound close to the second winning effect sound can be generated, and the second winning effect sound or the second winning effect sound is detected based on the detection of the second starting winning switch 224b. The confusion winning effect sound may be generated and the confusion winning effect sound may be generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 (in the case where the pseudo holding icon 466 is displayed). It should be noted that the functions of the sub-control device 262 and the like that generate these sound effects constitute the sound effect generating means.

  In this case, even if the start winning device 33a, 33b is not directly visually recognized, it is possible to confirm the entry of the game ball into the starting winning device 33a, 33b by the sound effect, and the game can be progressed more smoothly. You can Further, the pseudo-holding icon 466 (main hold icon 464 (main hold) It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is immediately determined that the icon is not the icon 463).

  Furthermore, the confusion winning effect sound may be derived even when the second start winning switch 224b is detected. Therefore, even if the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed due to the difference in the sound effect, the effect sound is not accompanied, and thus it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is immediately determined that it is not the temporary hold icon 464 (main hold icon 463). be able to. As a result, the effect that the game ball may have entered the second start winning device 33b can be made more realistic.

  The confusion winning effect sound may be created separately from the first winning effect sound and the second winning effect sound, or may be configured by outputting the first winning effect sound and the second winning effect sound at the same time. Good. Further, the first winning effect sound or the confusion winning effect sound may be generated based on the detection of the first start winning effect switch 224a. In addition, the confusion winning effect sound derived based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 constitutes the pseudo winning mode.

  Further, for example, a first start winning ball measurement counter that counts the number of detections of the first starting prize switch 224a and a second starting ball measurement counter that counts the number of detections of the second starting prize switch 224b are provided. The device 262 compares the number of times the first starting prize switch 224a is detected per predetermined period with the number of times the second starting prize switch 224b is detected, and compares the number of times the second starting prize switch 224b is detected with the first starting prize switch 224a. When the ratio of the number of times of detection of is less than or equal to the specified value, the confusion winning effect sound may be generated based on the detection of the second starting winning switch 224b.

  In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is given the impression that the game balls have not entered the first start winning device 33a. The function of comparing the number of detections of the first start prize winning switch 224a and the number of detections of the second start prize winning switch 224b of the sub-control device 262 per predetermined period constitutes the winning percentage determination means.

  Also, for example, when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, a sound effect is added (the jackpot state or the reach effect in the decorative pattern display device 42 may be excluded or the volume may be lowered). You may comprise. As an example of a mode, when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, either the first blade opening sound effect or the second blade opening sound effect is derived, and the blade member 37 is moved to the closed position. In the case where only the pseudo blade member 431 is independently displaced to the functional position in the state of being maintained, the second blade opening effect sound may be derived. The sound effect associated with the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 in the pseudo blade effect is set separately.

  (P) In the above embodiment, based on the detection of the first start prize switch 224a, the second start prize switch 224b, or the detection of the pseudo prize detection switch 445, the game ball to the start prize device 33a or 33b. The suggestion display suggesting the entry of a ball may be configured to be performed in a place other than the starting winning unit 401 and the normal symbol display device 41. For example, a predetermined light emitting means (a light emitting means built in the center frame 47 or the annular illumination portion 102 of the front frame set 14) is caused to emit light, or the hold icon 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42 is made to appear more flashy. In the decorative pattern display device 42, a smaller character may appear, or a mode (display, sound effect, etc.) originally planned to be derived may be derived at that timing. In this case, there is an opportunity that the player does not see how the game balls enter the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b based on such a display, or does not look at the starting winning unit 401 because he / she wants to visually recognize such a display. You can increase. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the operational effect of having the game proceed without paying attention to how the game balls enter the starting winning devices 33a and 33b.

  (Q; Proximity Detection Sensor) In the above-described embodiment, proximity detection means capable of detecting proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of positions of the decorative pattern display device 42 and connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. (For example, a proximity detection sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, a touch panel, or the like) may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like close to the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative pattern display device 42, the proximity is detected based on the detection of the finger or the like. If the target for which is detected is the pseudo holding icon 466, it may be erased, and if the target for which proximity is detected is the temporary holding icon 464, the display may be switched to the main holding icon 463. In this case, it is possible to improve interest in the hold icon 461 and further enhance the familiarity with the effect (pseudo hold, etc.) that the game ball may have entered the start winning apparatus 33a, 33b.

  (R) In the above-described embodiment, exchange of data (so-called mobile linked game) is performed between the pachinko machine 10 and the server operated by the game machine manufacturer or the like via a communication portable terminal owned by the player. It may be configured so that it can be performed. Furthermore, when terminating the mobile interlocking game, the two-dimensional code including the current game information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with the mobile communication terminal, and at the same time, the mobile communication terminal In a configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 has a first start winning counter for counting the number of balls entered into the first starting prize winning device 33a and a second starting prize winning device. It is provided with a second entrance counter for counting the number of entrances to 33b and a pseudo entrance counter for counting the number of times of detection of the pseudo prize detection switch 445, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile interlocking game. The two-dimensional code is configured to include information indicating the value of the first entrance counter, the value of the second entrance counter, and the value of the pseudo entrance counter. It may be that you are. Further, information on the total number of game balls shot may be included in the two-dimensional code. In this case, the game machine maker can grasp the degree of entry into each of the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b.

  The value of the first ball entrance counter, the value of the second ball entrance counter, and the value of the pseudo ball entrance counter are erased by being two-dimensionally encoded, and otherwise (even if the power is turned off. ) It may be accumulated. Further, the tendency of the behavior pattern of the pseudo blade member 431 may be configured such that the player can select from several types (for the player performing the mobile linked game).

  (S) In the above embodiment, the second starting winning device 33b is arranged below the first starting winning device 33a. However, for example, the second starting winning device 33b may be arranged horizontally and horizontally. . Further, in the above embodiment, the front decoration portion 403 not only covers the front of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, but also another winning device or the like (for example, the variable winning device 32 or the through gate 34). You may comprise so that it may cover. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the number of the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the variable winning devices 32, the through gates 34, etc. are not particularly limited and can be set for each model. For example, two variable winning devices 32 may be provided, or three or more starting winning devices 33a and 33b and through gates 34 may be provided.

  Further, the second starting winning device 33b of the above embodiment includes a pair of left and right blade members 37 whose central axis extends in the front-rear direction. For example, like the variable winning device 32, the central axis extends in the left-right direction. The second starting winning device 33b may be configured to be changed between an open state and a closed state by rotationally displacing the shutter. When the configuration is adopted, for example, the shutter may have a two-sheet structure of a front pseudo shutter (for example, a decoration on the front side) and a rear main shutter (for example, a transparent plate shape). Further, in the case of adopting such a configuration, when the pseudo blade shutter is projected to the rear of the upper side part and the pseudo blade member is set to the functional position, the folded portion that covers the front edge portion of the blade member 37 in the open position from the front is provided. It may be configured to be provided. Regarding the second starting winning device 33b, it is also possible to always enter a game ball or omit the blade member 37 like the first starting winning device 33a.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls (prize balls) that are paid out when the game balls enter the first starting prize device 33a and the payout when the game balls enter the second starting prize device 33b. Although the number of game balls to be played is set to be the same, it may be set to be different. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, in a configuration in which the game balls can be easily entered into the second starting prize device 33b, the number of prize balls corresponding to the first starting prize device 33a may be increased. Good.

  (T) In the above embodiment, the timing at which the game balls are paid out from the payout device 358 (see FIG. 5) through the payout passage 68 (see FIG. 3) to the ball tray such as the upper plate 19 can be changed. A payout time adjustment means that can be used may be provided. In this case, even if the pseudo blade member 431, the pseudo holding icon 466, and the like are provided, the start winning unit is determined depending on whether or not the game balls are paid out (prize balls) based on the fact that the game balls enter the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. Whether or not the game ball that has entered 401 (covering area on the back surface of the front decorative portion 403) has entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b (whether the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 is taught). It is possible to suppress the situation where people are grasped before).

  As an example of the aspect, as shown in FIG. 55, the payout time adjusting means 791 that constitutes a part of the payout passage 68 that communicates between the payout device 358 and the upper plate 19 is provided in the left-right direction (the front-back direction is also possible). A main passage 792 as a first passage that extends in a meandering manner, a predetermined position (first position) of the main passage 792, and a position (second position) downstream of the main passage 792 are connected in a relatively short distance. The bypass passage 793 as the second passage thus provided, and the closed portion for guiding the game ball to the main passage 792, which is provided at the connecting portion of the main passage 792 and the bypass passage 793 (the entrance of the bypass passage 793) (the first passage) (1 guide state) and a state that guides the game ball to the bypass passage 793 and a second guide state, and a shutter 794 as a switching unit that can be switched. Further, the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 pass through the main passage 792 (without passing through the bypass passage 793) to the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15 when the upper plate 19 is full of game balls). The second time required when the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 are paid out to the upper plate 19 via the bypass passage 793 is shorter than the first time required when the payout is performed.

  Then, for example, in the jackpot state where the game balls are paid out relatively frequently or in the probability variation mode, the shutter 794 is opened, and in the normal mode in which it is relatively easy to notice even when the game balls are paid out, the shutter 794 is basically closed ( It may be configured such that it does not continue to be closed but is opened appropriately. In this case, it becomes difficult to determine when the game ball paid out to the upper plate 19 or the like corresponds to the winning ball to which prize winning device, and the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b are provided by paying out the game ball. It is possible to prevent a situation where a player is supposed to win a prize.

  Further, it is possible to perform various effects by using the payout time adjusting means 791. Further, when adopting such a configuration, the shutter 794 may be configured to be opened based on the operation of the effect button 125 or the like. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot types with different round numbers, the shutter 794 is basically closed, and the game balls paid out corresponding to the winning of the variable winning device 32 in the previous round are the meandering main. When flowing down the passage 792 and continuing the round, the shutter 794 is opened (and the game balls are paid out at once to the upper plate 19) based on the player's operation of the effect button 125. You may comprise. In this case, it is possible to give a refreshing feeling that the player is paying out the game ball, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, the shutter 794 may be maintained in the closed state when the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) is not stored in a reserved state. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game and leaving the seat before the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19.

  The configuration of the payout time adjusting means 791 is not particularly limited, and for example, the first passage extending in a meandering manner, the second passage provided in parallel with the first passage, and extending substantially linearly, and the payout device 358. A switching valve that can be switched between a first guide state in which the game ball paid out from the first passage is guided to the first passage and a second guide state in which the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 is guided to the second passage. You may comprise so that it may be equipped. Further, the time required when the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 are paid out to the upper plate 19 via the payout passage, changes not only by the distance of the payout passage but also by the angle, shape (course) and the like. .

  (U) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable jackpot 32 of each jackpot type, etc. are not particularly limited and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the variable winning device 32 may perform the same operation as the jackpot state of "2RS", and may set the jackpot to which the "normal mode" is given after the jackpot state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the “probability variation mode” is given after the end of the jackpot state of “2RS”, but instead, it is a low ball entry state and a high probability state, and in the decorative symbol display device 42. May be configured to be provided with a “latent probability mode” that is not taught which of the high-probability state and the low-probability state.

  In the decorative pattern display device 42, the teaching about winning the probability variation jackpot (15RS) with a payout may be configured to be performed at least by the time the corresponding jackpot state ends. , It is not performed even if the corresponding jackpot state ends (even in the probability variation mode internally, the decorative symbol display device 42 shifts to the same pullback stage as the time reduction mode, and the special display device 43L in the time reduction mode. , 43R may exceed the upper limit number of times (100 times) in the time reduction mode, the transition to the probability variation stage may be performed.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / winning lottery varies, but the winning probability does not vary (is constant), and the period of the high-income state given after the jackpot state ends ( The above-described configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns of variation times) are prepared. Furthermore, in the winning / winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a (and the second starting winning device 33b), the variable winning device 32 operates similarly to the jackpot state of "2RS", while the game mode is It may be configured so that there may be a case where the "small hit" that does not change is won.

  In addition, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second starting winning device 33b when winning, and the like can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the winning upper limit of the game ball in one opening to the second starting winning device 33b may be set. More specifically, when a starting winning upper limit counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second starting winning device 33b reaches the winning upper limit is provided and the detection of the second starting winning switch 224b is performed. When (for example, after step S503 of the start winning process), the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the start winning upper limit counter is performed and the second starting winning device 33b is opened (for example, the step of the universal figure discrimination information setting process). After S2405 and S2407, a value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set in the starting winning upper limit counter (for example, 1 is set if the winning upper limit is one), and the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state. In the middle, if the timing for closing is not yet reached (for example, if a negative determination is made in step S2204 of the starting winning device control process), the starting winning is won. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter has become “0”, and if a negative determination is made, the starting prize winning device control processing is ended as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made, the second starting prize winning device is immediately executed. The process shifts to the process of closing 33b (step S2205) Also, in the process (for example, after step S2218) performed when the second starting winning device 33b has the right to be opened a plurality of times, A value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set in the starting winning upper limit counter (for example, 1 is set when the winning upper limit is one).

  (V) In the above embodiment, the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize device 33b. Regardless of which it is, the corresponding variable display is suspended in the order in which the game balls enter the first start prize device 33a and the second start prize device 33b. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the second variation display that is suspended after the first variation display that is already suspended is exhausted before the first variation display, so that the suspended order is changed, The second variable display may be preferentially digested over the first variable display.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the big win is won in the winning / winning lottery performed based on the ball entering the first starting prize device 33a, and the winning is performed based on the ball entering the second starting prize device 33b. It is configured so that the distribution ratio of the jackpot types that can be awarded is the same as when the jackpot is won in the win / loss lottery, but the win / loss is performed when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a. Different jackpot type tables may be referred to in the lottery and the winning / winning lottery performed when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, and the jackpot types may be distributed differently. For example, when a big win is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the winning of the second starting winning device 33b, compared to a case where the big win is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the winning of the first starting winning device 33a. Configured so that the percentage of jackpot jackpots is high and the percentage of jackpots that are given the probability variation mode (not the latent probability mode) is high (the same percentage that a high probability state is given) It may be selected when the big win is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the winning of the second starting winning device 33b, and the big win is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the winning of the first starting winning device 33a. It may be configured such that a jackpot of no type can be given.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the prize balls to be given to the player depending on whether there is a ball to the first starting prize device 33a or a second starting prize device 33b. Although the numbers are different, they may be the same.

  (W) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to perform the main process (see FIG. 9) and then the normal process (see FIG. 10). However, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after the step S111 of the main process, the process of updating the counter value, which is performed in the steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above-described embodiment, is performed. For example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec, The processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. As the processing of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and if the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which a flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the processing of step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

  (X) In the above-described embodiment, the information on whether or not the jackpot state is generated is overwritten in the hit / random number storage area for storing the value of the hit / random number counter C1. It is not limited to. For example, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be provided separately from the winning random number storage area for the execution area of the special variation holding area and each holding area. In addition to the area, a storage area corresponding to each of the execution areas of the special variation suspension area and each suspension area may be provided, and information about whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be stored in the storage area. A storage area for storing the jackpot type may be provided separately from the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3 may be provided. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the winning is confirmed again, and the result of the confirmation processing (the state of the winning flag or the like). ), The variable display pattern or the like may be determined.

  (Y) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed to a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state that allows the player to enter the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits the player to enter the specific area ( Detecting the game ball that entered the specific ball entering means, the specific ball entering means and the non-specific ball entering means that can enter the game ball that entered the specific area Specific entrance detecting means (condition establishment detecting means), special starting means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and detecting a game ball entering the special starting means The special starting detection means and the main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entering means are provided, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is a specific ball entering means and a non-specific ball entering means. Regardless of which ball you enter, the player is given a certain number of game values (game balls) The main control means, based on the detection of the special start detection means, a small hit state in which the variable ball entering means is opened for one time or a plurality of times for the first time, or the variable ball entering means for the first time Whether or not to generate a jackpot state in which the game is opened for a second time longer than that, or until a specified number of game balls enter the variable winning means that has been opened is defined as one round and this is repeated a specified number of times. In the case of winning or losing lottery, if a small hit is won in the winning or failing lottery, a small hit state is generated, and if a big hit is won in the winning or failing lottery, You may apply to the game machine which produces a big hit state.

[Appendix]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiment will be described below.

  A. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting winning means provided on the game board, a win / loss lottery is performed to determine whether or not the hit state is generated, and a win / loss lottery is performed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

  As the starting winning means, for example, a first starting winning means that can always enter a game ball, and a second that can enter a game ball only when a predetermined open lottery is won. In the configuration including the starting winning means, if it is difficult to enter the game ball into the first starting winning means without winning the open lottery, it becomes relatively difficult to smoothly advance the game. At the same time, it is feared that the image of the gaming machine will deteriorate and the willingness to play will be significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, for example, by arranging the first start winning means and the second start winning means close to each other and increasing the chances of opening the second starting prize means, even if the first starting prize means is Even if it is difficult for the game ball to enter the game ball, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning means, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in the ease of entering the starting prize means as a whole. It is possible to adopt.

  However, in general, in a pachinko machine, the game is basically to hit a game ball aiming at a first starting winning means that can always enter the game ball. Therefore, the player tends to have a stronger impression as to whether or not the game ball easily enters the first start winning means. Therefore, how much it is difficult to enter the game balls into the first starting prize means can be compensated by improving the ease of entering the second starting prize means (even if the first starting prize means is included). Even if the easiness of entering the game ball into the game is reduced, the easiness of entering the game ball into the first and second starting prize means is not inferior or even improved.) Even so, if it is still difficult to enter the game ball into the first start winning means and the condition (nearly) is not repeated is repeated, an impression of the game machine, the game hall in which the game machine is installed, etc. There is concern that it will get worse.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and the purpose thereof is to deteriorate the impression resulting from a decrease in the ease with which a game ball enters the first start winning means. It is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the above.

Means A-1-a. A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
First start winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
The game ball moving in the game area is configured to be changeable between an open state in which a game ball can be entered and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter (the game is more than the first start winning means). Second starting winning means arranged on the downstream side of the area),
A first start prize detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the first start winning means,
A second start prize detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second start winning means,
Based on the detection of the first start prize detection means or the second start prize detection means, a win / win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and based on the result of the win / win lottery. A gaming machine comprising a main control means for generating the special gaming state,
In the game area, a front cover means is provided at a distance from the game board so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and covers at least the front of the first start winning means and the second start winning means collectively. A gaming machine characterized by being present.

  According to the means A-1-a, the front covering means for collectively covering the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means is provided, so that the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means are surrounded. Therefore, the visibility of the game ball that moves in is relatively lowered, and it becomes difficult to know whether the game ball entered the first start winning means or the second start winning means. Therefore, the second start winning means is set to be in an open state in a balance that reduces the time period in which the player is likely to feel stress, such as not being able to win or lose the winning ball even though the player is firing the game ball. In this case, as long as the player has entered the game ball on the back side of the front covering means, the game ball enters either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means, It is possible to proceed with the game as if the lottery was won. In other words, even if the game ball entering the first starting prize means is low, if the game ball enters the second starting prize means relatively easily, the winning / winning lottery can be received constantly. , There is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the game ball has entered the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means, so the first starting gradually. You will not be worried about whether a game ball is easy to enter the winning means. As a result, even if the game balls are less likely to enter the first start winning means, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression resulting from that and receive much stress. The game can be progressed without.

  Further, by providing the front covering means, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity in the peripheral portions of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. In other words, if the player hits the game ball aiming at the front covering means, it is possible to obtain a comparatively easy-to-understand visual image that the player will enter either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. Further, the front covering means for collectively covering the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means can make more dynamic decoration and the like, and can improve the design.

  The front covering means may be formed integrally with a portion that covers the first starting winning means and a portion that covers the second starting winning means (integral molding, or a separate body is integrated). Alternatively, separate components may be arranged adjacent to each other. In addition, "a portion of the front covering means that allows a game ball to pass through at least a game area behind the front covering means (for example, covers the front of the winning means such as the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means). The parts other than the parts) may be transparent (made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, or have slits, etc.) ”. In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which the player or the like who plays the game for the first time becomes uneasy by not seeing what is happening on the back side of the front covering means. Further, for example, the pre-covering means may be used as a place for teaching predetermined information to the player. For example, the front covering means may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning or losing lottery, etc.) or an image character. In addition, the "pre-covering means may be attached to the game board".

Means A-1-b. The first starting winning means is arranged on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the second starting winning means,
The game nails erected on the front surface of the game board have a pair of life nails provided above and below the left and right side portions of the winning opening of the first start winning means, and pass between the pair of life nails. The game ball is a configuration to enter the first start winning means,
The game machine according to the means A-1-a, wherein the front covering means is configured to cover the front of the life nail.

  According to the means A-1-b, it is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize how the game ball enters the first starting prize winning means. Therefore, the determination that the game ball has entered the first start winning means can be made based on various matters derived as a result of the game ball entering the first starting prize means. .. As a result, it is possible to further promote a game in which the pace at which the game balls enter the first start winning means is not particularly so concerned.

Means A-2-a. The second starting winning means includes a blade member that is displaceable between an open position that allows a game ball to enter the second starting winning means and a closed position that regulates the gaming ball.
The front covering means is provided so as to cover at least a part of the blade member in the closed position and a front part of the blade member in the open position. The gaming machine described in -1.

  According to the means A-2, the second start winning means is in the open position allowing the entrance of the game ball moving in the game area by setting the blade member in the open position, and the blade member is in the closed position. As a result, the game ball enters a closed state in which the entry of the ball is restricted.

  Incidentally, "the second starting winning means receives a game ball that moves in the game area and moves a ball receiving portion that guides the game ball to the outside of the game area, and moves the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion. Between an open position for guiding the game ball to the ball receiving part and a closed position for restricting movement of the game ball moving in the game area on the side of the ball receiving part to the ball receiving part side. And a displaceable vane member ”. Further, the front covering means constitutes a part of the starting winning means (for example, a front wall of a ball receiving portion that receives a game ball moving in the game area and guides it to the opening side formed in the game board). May be

Means A-2-b. The pre-covering means includes a first object display section that models a first object,
The vane member (corresponding to a means A-3-b described later, a pseudo vane member) includes a second object display unit that models a second object,
By setting the blade member (the pseudo blade member corresponding to the means A-3-b) to the open position (the functional position corresponding to the means A-3-b), the second object Becomes a completed display state in which the third object is modeled together with the first object,
By setting the blade member (the pseudo blade member corresponding to the means A-3-b) to the closed position (the standby position corresponding to the means A-3-b), the second object The whole or most of the above is in an unfinished display state in which it is hidden behind the first object, and the gaming machine according to the means A-2-a.

  According to the means A-2-b, the first object display portion is provided for the front covering means, and the blade member (the pseudo blade member corresponding to the means A-3-b described later) is provided. When the open position is reached, by providing a second object display unit that displays a second object along with the first object in which the third object is modeled, a third object that partially moves in accordance with the movement of the blade member is provided. While gathering the line of sight, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front covering means, and to reduce the player's interest in how the game ball enters the starting winning means. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the operational effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to the decrease in the ease with which the game balls enter the first start winning means.

  Means A-2-c. The vane member in the open position (corresponding to the means A-3-b, a pseudo vane member) has its tip end located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front covering means. The game machine according to the means A-2-a or A-2-b.

  According to the means A-2-c, it is easy to recognize that the blade member is displaced to the open position (corresponding to the means A-3-b, the pseudo blade member is displaced to the functional position). it can.

  Means A-2-d-1. An opening covering means that is arranged in front of the blade member and covers the front of the blade member in the open position; and a closing cover means that covers the front of the blade member in the closed position. The game machine according to the means A-2-a.

  According to the means A-2-d-1, since the blade members at the closed position and the open position are hidden, it is difficult to grasp whether the blade member is at the open position or the closed position.

Means A-2-d-2. The front covering means includes an object display unit that models a predetermined object,
The object display unit includes an open-time covering unit that covers the front of the blade member in the open position as the open-time covering unit and a close-time covering unit that covers the front of the blade member in the closed position. The gaming machine according to the means A-2-d-1, which is provided with a closing cover.

  According to the means A-2-d-2, by providing the object display unit to the front covering means, while gathering the line of sight to the front covering means, the visibility of the back side of the front covering means is reduced or the starting is started. It is possible to reduce the player's interest in how the game ball enters the winning means. Further, since the blade member is hidden by the cover portion when open and the cover portion when closed, it is difficult to know whether the blade member is in the open position or the closed position. In addition, by using the displacement of the blade member, the object display unit can derive a mode as if the object were moving (due to the afterimage effect).

Means A-2-e. The first starting winning means is arranged on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the second starting winning means,
The game nails erected on the front surface of the game board have a pair of life nails provided above and below the left and right side portions of the winning opening of the first start winning means, and pass between the pair of life nails. The game ball is a configuration to enter the first start winning means,
A means A- characterized in that the object display portion of the front covering means has an index portion which indicates an appropriate position of (the head of) the life nail in the vicinity of the pair of life nails. The gaming machine according to any one of 2-b to A-2-d.

  According to the means A-2-e, by comparing the pair of right and left life nails and the index portion, it is possible to accurately and quickly determine whether the distance between the life nails is wide or narrow. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to relatively determine whether or not the life nail needs to be maintained, or the player can judge whether the life nail needs to be maintained or not when the distance between the life nails is narrow compared to the indicator portion. You can avoid games so that you will not be at a disadvantage. As a result, the distance between the life nails can be made as constant as possible, and it is possible to reduce the variation of each game machine with respect to the ease with which the game balls enter the first start winning means. In particular, since the indicator portion is provided in the front covering means, it is close to the tip portion (head portion) of the life nail, whereby the inclination of the life nail can be grasped more reliably.

Means A-3-a. At least a part of the front coating means has a see-through property,
In a state where the blade member is in the closed position, a pseudo blade opening means that can derive a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member exists in the open position (a position other than the closed position) is provided. The gaming machine according to the means A-2.

  If the blade member is in the closed position, the game ball cannot be inserted into the second start winning means. For this reason, the player who recognizes that the blade member is in the closed position tends to shift his line of sight to the first start winning means and observe whether or not the game ball enters the first starting winning means. ..

  In this respect, according to the means A-3-a, the pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member exists in the open position is derived even at the timing when the second starting winning means is not opened. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that a predetermined action related to the blade member will occur from the visual recognition state in which the second starting winning means is closed. Therefore, if a player who is interested in opening the second start winning means is informed that some action has occurred in the second starting winning means in the closed state, the second starting winning means is It is conceivable that the line of sight may be redirected to the second starting winning means to determine whether the vehicle has been opened. However, in reality, there is a case where the pseudo blade is opened, and since the pseudo blade opened is as if the blade member is present at the open position, the second start winning means is a quick one. It is possible to distinguish whether the blade member is in the open position by just looking or entering the edge of the field of view, or whether the blade member is in the closed position only by deriving the pseudo blade opening mode. It is difficult, or mistaken (for a moment) as the blade member is displaced to the open position.

  As described above, the pseudo-blade opening mode is only for making it look as if the blade member is opened, and by this, the blade member seems to be opened, but the game ball is provided in the second starting winning means. When there is no sign of entering the ball, the state of entering the game ball of the second starting winning means and the appearance of the second starting winning means do not always match. Then, if the pseudo-blade opening mode is repeated to some extent, if the game ball is constantly entering the second starting winning means or the like and there is no delay in the game (the starting winning means does not enter the gaming ball too much. It is possible to reach a state where the user is not so concerned about whether or not the blade member is in the open state unless the game is forced to be disadvantageous. As a result, even if the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning means is reduced, the operational effect that the deterioration of the impression resulting from that can be suppressed is further enhanced. Will be played.

  Furthermore, by the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing when the second starting winning means is opened (or closed). Therefore, the gap between the advanced player and the beginner player who can play the game ball only when the second start winning means is opened and the game ball can be entered. It is possible to suppress the situation where the open.

  Further, by utilizing the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to perform an effect that is involved in opening and closing the blade member, or an effect that is simply lively regardless of opening and closing of the blade member. In addition, as the game progresses, the pseudo-blade opening mode becomes a part of the game scenery, accents and liveliness during the game, or rhythm (feeling lonely when it disappears) can be improved.

  In addition, in a state where the pseudo blade opening mode is derived (for example, a pseudo blade member to be described later is in a functional position), the blade member in the closed position may or may not be in the closed position. It is desirable to be configured so that the change in the visual recognition mode of the place to be operated is reduced. For example, when a cover covering the front of the blade member (and the pseudo blade member) in the closed position is provided, or when the blade member is displaced to the open position corresponding to the rear position of the blade member in the closed position, It may be configured such that the design is imitated (the front surface shape) of the blade member so as to be visible. In this case, it is more difficult to determine whether the pseudo blade opening mode has been derived or whether the blade member is really in the open position (whether or not the blade member is in the closed position). The effect of providing the means is further enhanced.

Means A-3-b-1. The pseudo blade opening means is arranged in front of the blade member and can cover a functional position capable of covering the front side of the blade member in the open position and a front side of the blade member in the closed position. Equipped with a pseudo blade member that can be displaced between the standby position,
Means, wherein the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the game area behind the pseudo blade member when the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. The gaming machine described in A-3-a.

  According to the means A-3-b-1, the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived more realistically. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide pseudo blade opening means that imitates the aspect of the blade member behind the blade member, but in this case, since the pseudo blade opening means is arranged relatively behind, Even if the blade opening means is in the pseudo blade opening mode, it may be difficult to see. In addition, the game ball may pass in front of the pseudo blade opening means in the pseudo blade opening mode. Due to these, there is a possibility that it is instantly recognized that the pseudo blade opening mode is pseudo. In this respect, the provision of the pseudo blade member in front of the blade member can eliminate the above-mentioned concern.

  Further, since the pseudo blade member can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member is kept in the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be moved without inviting more game balls than necessary into the second starting winning means. To fully utilize the operating mode (for example, the mode in which the character operates when the pseudo-feather member is part of the character display, the mode in which the second start winning means opens (delicately), etc.) You can

  The shape of the pseudo blade member is not limited to the plate shape. For example, a square frame shape that opens in the displacement direction of the pseudo blade member and can accommodate the blade member inside, or a square frame shape It may be configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section such that a part thereof is cut out. Further, with respect to the means A-2-c, the pseudo blade member in the functional position may be projected more outward than the outer edge of the front covering means. That is, while making it difficult to understand the location of the blade member, making the location of the pseudo blade member easy to understand makes people aware of the effect using the pseudo blade member, while paying attention to the opening and closing of the blade member. It is possible to have the game proceed while suppressing the loss.

  Means A-3-b-2. The means for opening pseudo blades also displaces the pseudo blade member to the functional position when the blade member is displaced to the open position. Amusement machine.

  According to the means A-3-b-2, when the blade member is in the open position, the blade member is viewed from the front, and when the blade member is in the closed position but the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. The pseudo vane member can be made the same as the front view (the pseudo vane members in the functional position are both visible). Therefore, the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode can be further enhanced. Further, when adopting the configuration, it is not necessary to make the aspect of the front surface of the blade member the same as the aspect of the pseudo blade member, and it is necessary to perform processing such as drawing a graphic on the front surface of the blade member. It doesn't have to be applied. Therefore, the configuration of the blade member can be simplified, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member, the figure or the like rubs against the pseudo blade member, and the design is deteriorated. It is possible to prevent the accident.

  Means A-3-b-3. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member extend on the same straight line. The gaming machine described in 3-b-1 or A-3-b-2.

  According to the means A-3-b-3, the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member can be relatively easily synchronized. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member is being displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member to cover the front of the blade member. Therefore, the function and effect such as making the location of the blade member difficult to understand are further exhibited. It should be noted that the shaft for blades connected to the blade members may be inserted inside the shaft for blades having a substantially cylindrical shape. In this case, the rotation axes of the blade member and the pseudo blade member can be extended on the same straight line relatively easily.

  Means A-3-b-4. The vane member presses the pseudo vane member when the vane member is displaced from the closed position to the open position to displace the pseudo vane member from the standby position to the functional position. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a section.

  According to the means A-3-b-4, when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the blade member is driven first (mainly), the pseudo blade member follows it. Become. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the blade members and the pseudo blade member from moving independently, and to move them in synchronization with each other as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the functional position are deviated from each other, and the blade member is displaced to the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is displaced to the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is easy to understand whether or not it is just done.

  When the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the standby position to the functional position, the blade side driving means for operating the blade member and the pseudo blade Of the pseudo side driving means for operating the member, the blade side driving means may be driven.

  Means A-3-b-5. The pseudo vane member presses the vane member when the pseudo vane member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position to displace the vane member from the open position to the closed position. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-4, which is provided with a section.

  According to the means A-3-b-5, when the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, when the pseudo blade member is driven first (mainly), the blade member follows it. Become. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the blade members and the pseudo blade member from moving independently, and to move them in synchronization with each other as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displacing to the closed position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displacing to the standby position are deviated from each other, and the blade member was in the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes easier to understand whether or not it existed in.

  When the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, the blade side driving means for operating the blade member and the pseudo blade Of the pseudo side driving means for operating the member, the pseudo side driving means may be driven.

  Means A-3-b-6. Means A-3-b, wherein the blade member is made of a material which is colorless and transparent or has a hue of the same system as that of a member located behind the blade member in the open position. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to A-3-b-5.

  According to the means A-3-b-6, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the blade member (it becomes difficult to confirm the operation and location of the blade member). Therefore, the operational effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further exhibited.

Means A-3-b-7. A sub control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Opening and closing control of the second start winning means is executed by the main control means,
The drive control of the pseudo blade opening means is executed by the sub control means (corresponding to the information on the opening and closing of the second starting winning means from the main control means) A-3- The gaming machine described in b-1 to A-3-b-6.

  According to the means A-3-b-7, it is possible to reduce the control load of the main control means.

Means A-3-b-8. The pseudo blade opening means is
When the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member in the standby position is displaced to the functional position,
When the vane member in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo vane member in the functional position is displaced to the functional position,
The main control means, prior to the process of displacing the blade member to the open position, outputs to the sub-control means opening schedule information indicating that the blade member is displaced to the open position,
The game machine according to the means A-3-b-7, wherein the sub-control means displaces the dummy blade member to the standby position when the opening schedule information is received.

  According to the means A-3-b-8, when the vane member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo vane member is already in the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it cannot be covered.

Means A-3-b-9. The pseudo blade member is configured to have a larger front surface area than the blade member,
When the vane member is in the open position and the pseudo vane member is in the functional position, the side portion of the pseudo vane member on the standby position side of the surface of the vane member on the closed position side. Is closer to the closed position,
When the vane member is in the closed position and the pseudo vane member is in the standby position, the side portion of the pseudo vane member on the functional position side is more than the surface of the vane member on the open position side. The game machine according to the means A-3-b-7 or the means A-3-b-8, which is located on the side of the open position.

  When the opening / closing control of the blade member and the drive control of the pseudo blade member are performed by different control means, the operation start timing of the blade member and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member may be slightly deviated. In this respect, according to the means A-3-b-9, the moving direction side of the blade member which can be moved first is configured to be additionally covered with the pseudo blade member, and the blade member is displaced slightly ahead of the displacement. Even if it does, it will fall within the range covered by the pseudo blade member. Therefore, it is easy to understand whether or not the blade member is displaced, and it is possible to prevent the design property from being deteriorated due to the deviation between the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member. it can.

Means A-3-b-10. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged below the central portion of the game board,
When at least the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member arranged in front of the blade member is larger than the upper surface of the blade member. The gaming machine according to the means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-9, characterized in that it is also configured to be located above.

  Generally, when a player plays a game machine, the player's face has a positional relationship such that the face of the player faces the central portion of the game board. When the blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged below the central portion of the game board, the player's line of sight with respect to the blade member and the pseudo blade member is directed obliquely downward (the blade member and the pseudo blade member are inclined. It looks like you can look into it from above. Therefore, even if the blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged in front and rear, there is a concern that the blade member and the pseudo blade member may be discriminated from each other in an instant.

  On the other hand, according to the means A-3-b-10, since the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member in the functional position is located above the upper surface of the blade member in the open position, the blade in the open position is provided. The members and the pseudo blade member in the functional position can be relatively arranged so as to overlap as much as possible when viewed from the upper front. Therefore, the operational effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further exhibited.

Means A-3-c-1. The pseudo blade opening means is
A pseudo open object that is provided at a position overlapping with the blade member in the open position in the front-rear direction and imitates the blade member in the open position;
The gaming machine according to the means A-3-a or A-3-b, further comprising: a pseudo light source that irradiates the pseudo open object with light.

  According to the means A-3-c-1, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade opening mode while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Incidentally, a pseudo blade member as described in the means A-3-b may be used together.

  Means A-3-c-2. At least a part of the pre-covering means is configured as a light guide plate, and the dummy light source causes light to enter the light guide plate from an end thereof, so that the blade member at the open position of the light guide plate is provided. The gaming machine according to means A-3-c-1, wherein the pseudo open object is configured to float up at a position covering the front.

  According to the means A-3-c-2, the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived in the front covering means, and the visibility of the pseudo blade opening mode can be improved. Further, in the pre-coating means, the pseudo blade opening mode can be visually recognized only when the pseudo light source emits light.

  Means A-3-c-3. The pseudo open object is provided at a position where the front is covered by the blade member in the open position (in the base plate for attaching the second starting winning means to the game board). The gaming machine described in Means A-3-c-1 or A-3-c-2.

  According to the means A-3-c-3, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade opening mode with a relatively simple structure at the rear (base plate) of the blade member.

Means A-3-c-4. The vane member (“the pseudo vane member” when the configuration of the above-mentioned means A-3-b is also used) is provided with a light emitting means visible from the front,
The pseudo-opening object of the pseudo-blade opening means is formed to imitate at least the light-emitting means, and means A-3-c-1 to A-3-c-3. Game machine.

  According to the means A-3-c-4, the wing member (pseudo wing member) has a visual mode in which the wing member (pseudo wing member) itself emits light, so that the wing member is in the open position and the pseudo open object. Further, it is possible to more strongly combine with the pseudo blade opening mode by the pseudo blade opening means using the pseudo light source (which can be confused by a quick glance at the intuitive judgment). It is also possible to simplify the configuration (shape) of the pseudo-opening object of the pseudo-blade opening means (it becomes a sufficiently pseudo mode by imitating only the light emitting means, not the whole).

Means A-3-c-5. The pseudo-open object not only overlaps the front and rear of the blade member in the open position, but also overlaps the front and rear of the blade member in the closed position and the front and rear of the blade member in the open position. It is also provided in the position between the overlapping position,
One of the means A-3-c-1 to A-3-c-4 is characterized in that the pseudo light source is configured to be able to sequentially irradiate the pseudo open objects with light. The game machine described.

  According to the means A-3-c-5, it is possible to derive a mode simulating that the blade member opens and closes. Therefore, it is possible to derive more realistic and various pseudo blade opening modes.

  Means A-4-a. When the first start prize detection means or the second start prize detection means is detected, a ball detection correspondence display means capable of deriving a ball detection correspondence display (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection. The gaming machine according to any one of the means A-1 to A-3, which is provided with.

  According to the means A-4-a, even if the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means are not directly visually recognized, the first starting winning means or the second It is possible to grasp (rather easily grasp) that the game balls enter the starting winning means and the right to receive the lottery is obtained. Therefore, the chance of directly visually recognizing the starting winning means is reduced, and the overall winning rate to the first and second starting winning means is low even if the winning rate to the first starting winning means is relatively low. If it is not low, put yourself in a situation in which you do not care whether the game ball enters the first start winning means or the second starting winning means (I'm really interested Will not fall into a situation). Therefore, it is possible to more surely suppress a situation in which the interest of the game is deteriorated due to the fact that the game balls are not easily entered in the first start winning means. On the other hand, even if it becomes slightly hard to see how the game balls enter the first start prize detecting means and the second start prize detecting means, it is possible to detect whether or not the game balls have entered. It is possible to give a sense of security to the player, since it can be confirmed firmly with.

Means A-4-b-1. In the covered area of the game area, the front of which is covered by the front covering means, is provided with a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area.
Based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, it is configured to be able to derive a pseudo winning mode as if the detection of the start winning detection means is performed, the game according to means A-4-a Machine.

  According to the means A-4-b-1, in the covering area where the front is covered by the front covering means, the pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the starting winning means. That is, by providing the pre-covering means, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means is relatively lowered, the pre-covering means is detected based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means. Derivation of a pseudo-winning mode in which a game ball that has entered the cover area on the back side may have entered the starting winning means (for example, in the detection of a pseudo-winning detection means installed in the covering area like the starting winning means) Based on this, the same reaction as when the start winning detection means is detected is derived, and if derived, the reaction is suggested by the detection of the start winning detection means, etc.) You can Therefore, as the action of the game ball for the starting winning means, it is possible to add the pattern of "may be entered" in addition to "entered" and "not entered". It is possible to increase the types of effects and diversify the effects. As a result, it is difficult to understand whether or not the game ball enters the starting winning means by providing the front covering means (dramatically increasing the value of the game ball entering the starting winning means). It is possible to improve interests.

  The pseudo winning detection means may be provided on the downstream side of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, or may be provided on the upstream side of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. However, it may be provided on the downstream side of one of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, and on the other upstream side. If the pseudo winning detection means is upstream of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, the game ball detected by the pseudo winning detection means becomes the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. It may be configured to be able to enter the ball, or may be configured to be unable to enter the ball. In addition, examples of the pseudo winning mode include a display mode on a predetermined display unit, a voice mode by a voice output unit, a light emission mode by a predetermined light emitting unit, and a combination thereof. Further, as the pseudo winning mode, for example, when detection is performed by the first starting winning means, the second starting winning means, and the pseudo winning detecting means, the entering detection corresponding display is displayed on the entering detection corresponding display means. As a pre-stage, a mode (including a pseudo winning mode) in which the right to be able to win the win / loss lot may be obtained, and thereafter, the detection is performed by the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means In the case of deriving a mode (a display corresponding to the ball detection) indicating that the right to win the win / loss lot has been obtained, the right to receive the win / win lottery cannot be obtained if it is detected by the pseudo winning detection means. It is possible to perform an effect such as deriving a mode indicating that the event has occurred.

  Means A-4-b-2. When the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is performed, the pseudo-detection-correspondence display in a mode different from that of the entrance-detection-correspondence display imitating the above-mentioned entrance-detection correspondence display ( The game machine according to A-4-b-1, wherein the pseudo-hold icon is configured to be derivable.

  In the configuration in which the entry detection correspondence display is displayed when the game ball enters the starting winning means, even if the state of entering the starting ball into the starting winning means of the game ball is made difficult to see by the front covering means, At the time when the entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is immediately understood that the game ball has not entered the starting winning means. In this respect, like the means A-4-b-2, by making it possible to display the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display, even at the timing when the entrance detection correspondence display is displayed, the game ball is still the starting winning means. It is possible to extend the understanding of the result of whether or not the player has entered the ball, and it is possible to perform an effect such as whether it is a display corresponding to the ball detection or a display corresponding to the pseudo ball detection. Therefore, the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means can be made even more interesting. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode (production as to whether a game ball has entered the starting winning means), and it is possible to improve interest.

  In addition, "When the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means is detected in the state where the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is displayed, the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is displayed. Instead, it may be configured to be able to derive the above-mentioned entry detection correspondence display ”. In this case, the visual recognition mode of the area in which the entrance detection correspondence display and the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display are displayed can be relatively neat. In addition, it is also possible to say that "the pseudo-ball entry detection correspondence display is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed since being displayed". That is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo entry detection correspondence display is displayed forever and the role of the pseudo entry detection correspondence display becomes difficult to understand.

  Means A-4-b-3. When the first start winning detection means or the second starting winning detection means is detected, the pseudo-win detection is performed before deriving a corresponding arrival detection display (main hold icon) corresponding to the detection. The gaming machine according to the means A-4-b-2, characterized in that a precursor display (temporary hold icon) that is similar to the corresponding display (pseudo hold icon) can be derived.

  According to the means A-4-b-3, while the enjoyment of whether or not the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display or the precursor display is changed to the entrance detection correspondence display is secured, the entrance detection is performed. It is possible to clarify the difference in the mode between the correspondence display and the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display (it is easy to understand that the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is not the entrance detection correspondence display). In other words, if you look closely at the display corresponding to the entrance detection and the display corresponding to the pseudo entrance detection, in the case where the display is similar or indistinguishable, the player does not It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is convinced that the display corresponding to the ball detection is a display corresponding to the ball detection, and causes a sense of distrust.

Means A-4-b-4. A variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information,
In the variable display means, the identification information is variably displayed, and after a predetermined time, with display control means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the win / loss lot,
An information acquisition unit that acquires information used in the winning / winning lottery when the first start winning detection unit and the second starting winning detection unit are detected.
The information acquired by the information acquisition unit, a plurality of holding storage unit capable of storing a predetermined number as an upper limit,
When the first start prize detection means and the second start prize detection means are detected during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means, the change display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is performed. A configuration that is performed after the variable display of the identification information being executed,
Means A- characterized in that the mode of the entrance detection correspondence display of the entrance detection correspondence display means is determined based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the hold storage means. The gaming machine according to 4-b-3.

  According to the means A-4-b-4, it is possible to perform a more various effect using the entrance detection correspondence display and the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display. For example, when a pseudo-ball-on-detection correspondence display of a predetermined type is derived based on the detection by the first start-winning winning detection means and the second start-winning winning detection means, when the display changes to the ball-onward detection corresponding display. It is possible to perform suggestive effects such as an increase in the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special gaming state. Incidentally, "when the number of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the holding storage means has reached the upper limit, the pseudo-winning-ball-detecting means detects the pseudo-winning-balls It is also possible not to derive the detection correspondence display ”.

  Means A-4-b-5. When the pseudo-ball-on-detection correspondence display is displayed, an additional display different from the pseudo-ball-on-detection correspondence display is displayed so as to overlap at least part of the front of the pseudo-ball-on-detection correspondence display. The gaming machine according to any of the means A-4-b-2 to A-4-b-4.

  According to the means A-4-b-5, at least a part of the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display mode is not made clear, so that the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display mode is not fixed. As a result, it is possible to strongly give the impression that there is a possibility of further change in the display corresponding to the pseudo entrance detection. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player confuses the pseudo-ball-on-detection corresponding display with the ball-on-detection corresponding display, and misunderstands the pseudo-ball-on-detection corresponding display as the ball-on-detection corresponding display. Trouble that can occur in (for example, only the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is performed, but by misunderstanding this as the entrance detection correspondence display, processing that can be executed when the entrance detection correspondence display is performed It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as not being executed. It should be noted that “when the additional display is also derived to the precursor display”, “instead of the precursor display, when the entrance detection correspondence display is derived, it corresponds to the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display. The additional display that has been displayed as "is erased".

  Means A-4-b-6. A detection history storage unit is provided which can store the detection history (time of each detection) of the first start prize detection unit and the second start prize detection unit, and the detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo prize detection unit. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-5, wherein the storage information of the detection history storage means can be output.

  According to the means A-4-b-6, the player recognizes the pseudo winning mode, and thus misunderstands that the game ball has entered the starting winning means (for example, the player pseudo wins). In the unlikely event that a trouble occurs due to misunderstanding the ball detection correspondence display as a ball entry detection correspondence display, etc., data for explaining the situation etc. can be surely obtained (for example, variable display means etc. can be displayed, It can be sent to the hall computer), and it is possible to avoid the situation where the above trouble is troubled.

Means A-4-b-7. A sub control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-6, wherein the pseudo winning detection means is electrically connected to the sub-control means.

  According to the means A-4-b-7, the control load on the main control means can be reduced by reducing the information input to the main control means and the number of components for inputting information to the main control means as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud in the main control means.

Means A-4-b-8. There is a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is valid as a trigger of the winning / winning lottery, and an invalid state,
In the state where the detection by the starting winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means whose front is covered by the front covering means is valid, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is enabled,
Any of the means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-7, wherein the detection by the pseudo winning detection means is disabled in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is disabled. A game machine described in Crab.

  According to the means A-4-b-8, the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is displayed in a state where the entrance detection correspondence display is not supposed to be displayed, which means that the display is a pseudo entrance detection correspondence display. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interest is deteriorated due to the fact that the display corresponding to the false pseudo-ball detection is unnecessarily derived.

  Means A-5. The front of the game area is covered by the front covering means, or a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the covering area (corresponding to the means A-2-a, A game machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-4, characterized in that a path changing means for changing a traveling direction of a game ball is provided at a position below the blade member in the open position. ..

  For example, if the game ball enters the covered area and the blade member is in the open position, even if the game ball reaches the guide point guided to the starting winning means (ball receiving portion) by the blade member, the blade member is When it is in the closed position, the game ball is naturally not guided by the blade member but flows down the game area as it is and is discharged to the outside of the covered area. At this time, if the trajectory of the game sphere incident on the covered area and the trajectory after the game sphere is discharged from the covered area extend on a substantially straight line, the game sphere incident on the covered area is the first start prize. It is immediately grasped as being discharged from the covered area without entering the means and the second starting winning means.

  In this respect, since the course changing means is provided in the covering area like the means A-5, the advancing direction of the game ball changes in the covering area and the advancing speed of the gaming ball is delayed. It becomes difficult to follow the whereabouts of the game ball after entering the area. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the covered area to an easily visible location, and the game ball is the first start winning means or the second start winning means. You can create more situations where you may or may not have entered.

  In particular, corresponding to the means A-4-b-2, rather than directly visually checking the first start winning means and the second starting winning means to confirm whether the game ball has entered It is possible to make it easier to shift to a game property such as confirming a ball to the first start winning means and the second start winning means on the entry detection correspondence display of the correspondence display means. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to concentrate on the performance or accumulating stress by visually confirming that the game ball does not easily enter the first start winning means, and the whereabouts of the game involving the performance. You can immerse yourself in

  Corresponding to the above means A-4-b-1, "the course changing means is provided with a pseudo prize winning guide means for guiding the game ball moving in the covering area to the pseudo prize detecting means. " In this case, it is possible to easily bring the game ball to the pseudo-winning detection means. For example, although the pseudo-winning detection means is provided, it has to be installed at a position where the game ball does not pass so much due to the installation space. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where it hardly functions. Furthermore, the game sphere has a longer time lag from entering the covered area to being discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the starting winning means, and with the game ball entering the covered area, The effect of obscuring the correspondence with the game ball discharged from the covering region is more prominent.

Means A-6-a. At least a part of the front covering means is displaceably provided, and
Decorative drive means for displacing the front coating means is provided,
Any one of the means A-1 to A-5 characterized in that the decoration driving means is configured to be drivable based on the detection by the first start winning detection means or the second starting winning detection means. The game machine described.

  According to the means A-6-a, it is possible to detect the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means by the operation of the pre-covering means, so that the first starting winning means or the first starting winning means 2 It is possible to proceed with the game with a relatively sense of security without confirming that the game ball directly enters the starting winning means. As a result, the attention can be paid by the effect or the like that teaches the result of the win / loss lottery.

  It should be noted that the "pre-covering means may be configured to be displaceable in a similar manner regardless of which of the first start prize detecting means and the second start prize detecting means is detected". Further, in correspondence with the means A-4-b-1, it may be configured such that "the decoration driving means can be driven even when the pseudo winning detection means is detected". Good.

  Means A-6-b. The means A-6-a is characterized in that the front covering means is configured to be displaceable based on contact of a game ball with the front covering means even in a non-driving state of the decoration driving means. Game machine.

  According to the means A-6-b, it is possible to add interest to the operation of the pre-coating means. Further, since the front covering means is displaced only by the collision of the game ball with the front covering means, it is almost always expected that the game ball has entered the starting winning means for a beginner player. You can have it.

  In the non-driving state of the decoration driving means, the link mechanism for interlocking the decoration driving means and the front covering means is disengaged. In the non-driving state of the decoration driving means, the front covering means is supported by the elastic body. It may be configured to be performed. Further, the link mechanism that links the decoration driving means and the front covering means transmits the driving force of the decoration driving means to the front covering means via the elastic means (for example, the front covering means is pivotally supported). A part of the shaft portion may be formed in a coil spring shape).

Means A-7-a. A first winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the first starting winning detection means,
A second winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the second start winning detection means,
A sound effect generating means capable of generating the first winning effect sound and the confusion winning effect sound close to the second winning effect sound;
The sound effect generating means,
Generating the first winning effect sound (or the confusion winning effect sound; when used as an effect) based on the detection of the first start winning detection means,
7. The gaming machine according to any one of the means A-1 to A-6, wherein the second winning effect sound or the confusion winning effect sound is generated based on the detection by the second start winning detection means.

  According to the means A-7-a, even if the starting winning means is not directly visually recognized, it is possible to confirm the entering of the game ball into the starting winning means by the sound effect, and the game is advanced more smoothly. be able to. The confusion winning effect sound may be created separately from the first winning effect sound and the second winning effect sound, or may be configured by outputting the first winning effect sound and the second winning effect sound at the same time. Good. Further, in correspondence with the means A-4-b-1, it is also possible to "generate the confusion winning effect sound even when the pseudo winning detection means is detected". In this case, the effect that the game ball may have entered the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means can be made more realistic.

Means A-7-b. And a winning percentage determining means for comparing the number of times of detection by the first starting prize detecting means and the number of times of detecting by the second starting prize detecting means per predetermined period,
When the ratio of the number of times of detection by the first start winning detection means to the number of times of detection by the second start winning detection means is equal to or less than a specified value by the winning rate determination means, the sound effect generation means causes the second start The gaming machine according to the means A-7-a, wherein the confusion winning effect sound is generated based on the detection by the winning detection means.

  According to the means A-7-b, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is given an impression that the game balls are not much in the first start winning means.

  B. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting winning means provided on the game board, a win / loss lottery is performed to determine whether or not the hit state is generated, and a win / loss lottery is performed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

  Further, as the starting prize winning means, there is one which is provided with an opening / closing type starting winning means which is opened so that a game ball can be entered only when a predetermined open lottery is won. By the way, generally, although the production for teaching the result of the open lottery on whether to open the openable-winning start winning means, as the openable-winning start winning means itself, according to the open lottery. Just opening and closing, it lacked fun.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine equipped with a novel opening and closing start winning means.

Means B-1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
An opening-and-closing type starting winning means configured so that the state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter,
Starting winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the opening-and-closing type starting winning means,
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a main control means for performing a win / win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the win / win lottery. A gaming machine comprising and
In the configuration in which the opening / closing start winning means includes a blade member that is displaceable between an open position that allows a ball to enter the opening / closing start winning means and a closed position that regulates the ball,
In a state where the blade member is in the closed position, a pseudo blade opening means that can derive a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member exists in the open position (a position other than the closed position) is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being present.

  According to the means B-1, the pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member is present at the open position is derived even at the timing of opening the opening / closing start winning means. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance that a predetermined action related to the blade member will occur from the visual recognition state in which the openable-win type starting winning means is in the closed state. That is, in addition to "open" and "closed", a mode that "may be open" can be added as a visual mode of the opening and closing start winning means. Therefore, the mode of the opening-and-closing type starting winning means becomes more versatile, and the effect related to the opening and closing of the blade member and the suggestion of other states (indication of the game mode to stay, etc. , A suggestion of the result of the variable display, etc.) and a mere lively effect regardless of whether the blade member is opened or closed. As a result, it is possible to mount a novel opening / closing start winning means capable of diversifying playability and playability, etc., and to improve interest.

  Furthermore, by the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing at which the opening / closing start winning means is opened (or closed). Therefore, the gap between the advanced player and the beginner player who can play the game ball only when the opening and closing start winning means is opened and the game ball can be entered. It is possible to suppress the situation where the open.

  Further, for example, when the blade member is in the closed position, it is not possible to enter the game ball into the opening-and-closing type start winning means, and therefore, the always-starting moving winning means that can always enter the game ball is separately provided. In this case, a game ball will be launched aiming at the always-starting dynamic winning means. Here, when it is difficult to enter the game ball into the normal start dynamic winning means, the image of the game machine is deteriorated, and there is a concern that the willingness to play may be significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, by increasing the opportunities to open the opening-and-closing start winning means, even if it is difficult to enter the game ball into the always-starting dynamic winning means, the opening-and-starting starting winning means has a game ball. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration that makes it easier to enter the ball and avoids a decrease in the ease of entering the starting winning means as a whole.

  However, in general, in a pachinko machine, the game is basically to hit the game ball aiming at the always-starting dynamic winning means which can always enter the game ball. Therefore, the player tends to have a stronger impression as to whether or not the game ball easily enters the always-starting dynamic winning means. Therefore, the amount of difficulty in getting the game ball into the regular start dynamic winning means can be compensated by improving how easy it is to enter the opening / closing start winning means (even if the normal starting dynamic winning means is achieved). Even if the easiness of entering the game ball into the game is reduced, the easiness of entering the game ball as a whole into the starting winning means is not inferior or even improved), but still, If it is difficult to enter the game ball into the always-starting prize winning means, and the state of (nearly) not entering is repeated, the impression of the game machine and the game hall where the game machine is installed deteriorates. Is concerned.

  Therefore, the means B-1 is to be provided with "pseudo-blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo-blade opening mode as if the blade member is present at the open position". Therefore, even if the blade member is in the closed position, if the pseudo blade opening mode has been derived, the player's interest in the opening-and-closing start winning means will be greater than that in the normal start dynamic winning means. Can be pulled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the entertainment sphere is deteriorated due to the difficulty of the game sphere entering the always-starting movement winning means.

  Furthermore, the pseudo-blade opening mode is only to make it look as if the blade member is opened, and by this, the blade member seems to be opened, but the game ball enters the openable start winning means. There is no sign that the opening / closing start prize winning means does not always match the state of the game balls in the opening / closing start prize winning means. Then, if the pseudo-blade opening mode is repeated to some extent, if the game ball is constantly entering the opening / closing start winning means, etc. and there is no delay in the game (the game ball does not enter the starting winning means too much. It is possible to reach the state of not being so concerned about the aspect of the blade member and the pseudo-blade opening aspect unless the player is forced to play a disadvantageous game. As a result, even if the easiness of entering the game ball into the always-starting dynamic winning means is reduced, the operational effect that the deterioration of the impression resulting from that can be suppressed is further enhanced. Will be played.

  In addition, in a state where the pseudo blade opening mode is derived (for example, a pseudo blade member to be described later is in a functional position), the blade member in the closed position may or may not be in the closed position. It is desirable to be configured so that the change in the visual recognition mode of the place to be operated is reduced. For example, when a cover covering the front of the blade member (and the pseudo blade member) in the closed position is provided, or when the blade member is displaced to the open position corresponding to the rear position of the blade member in the closed position, It may be configured such that the design is imitated (the front surface shape) of the blade member so as to be visible. In this case, it is more difficult to determine whether the pseudo blade opening mode has been derived or whether the blade member is really in the open position (whether or not the blade member is in the closed position). The effect of providing the means is further enhanced. Further, the opening-and-closing type starting winning means of the means B-1 is configured by the second starting winning device 33b and the pseudo blade member 431 according to the main embodiment described above.

  In addition, "the opening-and-closing type start winning means receives a game ball that moves in the game area and moves a ball receiving portion that guides the game ball to the outside of the game area, and moves the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion. Between an open position for guiding the game ball to the ball receiving part and a closed position for restricting movement of the game ball moving in the game area on the side of the ball receiving part to the ball receiving part side. And a displaceable vane member ”.

Means B-2-a. In the game area, provided with a distance that allows game balls to pass between the game board and the game board, at least a front covering means for covering the front of the opening-and-closing type starting winning means,
The front covering means is provided so as to cover at least a part of the blade member in the closed position and a front part of the blade member in the open position,
At least a part of the front covering means is transparent, and the vane member is configured to be visible through the front covering means. A game machine according to means B-1.

  According to the means B-2-a, the visibility of the blade member and the visibility of the game ball moving around the opening / closing start winning means are provided by providing the front covering means for covering the front of the opening / closing start winning means. Will be relatively low. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference between the pseudo-blade opening mode and the mode in which the blade member is actually in the open position, and the situation in which the pseudo-blade opening mode is directly understood by the movement path of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Means B-2-b. The pre-covering means includes a first object display section that models a first object,
The vane member (corresponding to a means B-4 described later, a pseudo vane member) includes a second object display section that models a second object,
When the blade member (the pseudo blade member corresponding to the means B-4) is set to the open position (the functional position corresponding to the means B-4), the second object is moved to the first position. It will be in a completed display state that shapes the third object together with the object,
By setting the blade member (the pseudo blade member corresponding to the means B-4) to the closed position (the standby position corresponding to the means B-4), the whole or large size of the second object is obtained. The part is hidden behind the first object and is in an incomplete display state,
Means B, wherein when the pseudo-blade opening mode is derived by the pseudo-blade opening means, the pseudo-blade opening mode becomes the completed display state in which the pseudo-blade opening mode is combined with the first object to model the third object. -2-a the game machine.

  According to the means B-2-b, the first object display portion is provided for the front covering means, and when the blade member is in the open position, the third object is modeled together with the first object. By providing the second object display section that displays two objects, the line of sight is focused on the third object that moves in accordance with the displacement of the blade member, while the visibility on the back side of the front covering means is reduced, and the starting winning means is provided. It is possible to reduce the player's interest in how the game ball enters the. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the operational effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to the decrease in the ease with which the game balls enter the first start winning means.

  Also, the pseudo-blade opening means can bring the third object into a completed display state without displaying the blade member in the open position. Therefore, it is possible to more positively perform the effect using the third object. Further, even when the pseudo-blade opening mode is derived, the completion display state of the third object (which is easily recognized by the player as a shape) is displayed, and thus the pseudo-blade member may be displaced to the open position. The reality of the blade opening mode can be further enhanced.

Means B-2-c-1. In the covered area of the game area, the front of which is covered by the front covering means, is provided with a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area.
Means B-2-a or B-2, which is configured to be able to derive a pseudo winning mode as if the start winning detection means detected based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means. -The gaming machine described in b.

  According to the means B-2-c-1, in the covering region where the front is covered by the front covering means, the pseudo-winning detecting means is provided together with the opening / closing start winning means. That is, by providing the front cover means, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not the game ball has entered the opening / closing start winning means is relatively lowered, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, Derivation of a pseudo prize mode in which a game ball that has entered the covering area on the back side of the covering means may have entered the opening / closing start winning means (for example, a pseudo-installed in the covering area like the opening / closing starting winning means). Based on the detection of the prize detection means, derive a reaction similar to the case where the start prize detection means is detected, and if derived, suggest whether the reaction is due to the detection of the start prize detection means. Can be done). Therefore, as an action of the game ball for the opening and closing start winning means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", the pattern "may be entered" can be added. It is possible to increase the types of opportunities and productions and to diversify productions. As a result, the value of the fact that it was difficult to understand whether or not the game ball entered the starting winning means by providing the front covering means (production of whether the game ball entered the opening-and-closing type starting winning means) was dramatically increased. It can be increased and interest can be improved.

Means B-2-c-2. When the start winning detection means is detected, a ball detection correspondence display means capable of deriving a ball detection detection display (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection is provided.
When the detection of the pseudo-winning detection means is performed, the display for detecting the correspondence to the entrance, which corresponds to the display for detecting the entrance-detection, displays a display corresponding to the entrance-detection-corresponding display which is different from the above-mentioned display for the corresponding entrance-detection. The gaming machine according to B-2-c-1, which is configured to be derivable.

  When the game ball enters the opening-and-closing start winning means, the entrance detection corresponding display is displayed, so that it is difficult to see the state of the game ball entering the opening-and-closing starting prize means by the front covering means. Even then, at the time when the entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is immediately understood that the game ball has not entered the opening / closing start winning means. In this respect, by displaying the pseudo-ball entry detection corresponding display as in the means B-2-c-2, the game ball can still be opened / closed at the timing when the entry detection corresponding display is displayed. It is possible to postpone the fact that the result of whether or not the player has entered the means is known, and it is possible to perform an effect such as whether it is a display corresponding to the entrance detection or a display corresponding to the pseudo entrance detection. Therefore, the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the opening / closing start winning means can be made even more interesting. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode (production of whether or not a game ball has entered the opening / closing start winning means), and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Means B-2-c-3. When the start winning detection means is detected, before deriving a ball detection detection corresponding display (main hold icon) corresponding to the detection, the same as the pseudo ball detection detection display (pseudo hold icon) The gaming machine according to the means B-2-c-2, which is configured to be able to derive a precursor display (temporary hold icon) that is an aspect.

  According to the means B-2-c-3, at the stage when the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display or the precursor display is displayed, the entrance detection is performed while ensuring the enjoyment of whether or not the display changes to the entrance detection correspondence display. It is possible to clarify the difference in the mode between the correspondence display and the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display (it is easy to understand that the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is not the entrance detection correspondence display). In other words, if you look closely at the display corresponding to the entrance detection and the display corresponding to the pseudo entrance detection, in the case where the display is similar or indistinguishable, the player does not It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is convinced that the display corresponding to the ball detection is a display corresponding to the ball detection, and causes a sense of distrust.

Means B-2-c-4. There is a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is valid as a trigger of the winning / winning lottery, and an invalid state,
In the state where the detection by the starting winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means whose front is covered by the front covering means is valid, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is enabled,
Any of the means B-2-c-1 to B-2-c-3, wherein the detection by the pseudo winning detection means is disabled in a state where the detection by the predetermined start-up winning detection means is disabled. A game machine described in Crab.

  According to the means B-2-c-4, the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is displayed in a state where the entrance detection correspondence display is not supposed to be displayed, which means that the display is a pseudo entrance detection correspondence display. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interest is deteriorated due to the fact that the display corresponding to the false pseudo-ball detection is unnecessarily derived.

Means B-3. First start winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
The game ball moving in the game area is configured to be changeable between an open state in which a game ball can be entered and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter (the game is more than the first start winning means). Second start winning means as the opening-and-closing type starting winning means arranged on the downstream side of the area;
A first start prize detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the first start winning means,
A second starting prize detecting means as the starting winning detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the second starting winning means,
The main control means is configured to perform the winning / winning lottery based on the detection of the first starting winning detection means or the second starting winning detection means.
The game machine according to the means B-2, wherein the front covering means covers at least the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means collectively.

  According to the means B-3, the game balls are the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means by the front covering means which collectively covers the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means (opening-type starting winning means). It becomes difficult to know which of the means was used. Therefore, when the second starting winning means is set to be in an open state in a balance that allows the player to proceed with the game without being stressed so much, the player is the back side of the front covering means. As long as the game ball has entered the game ball, the game ball can enter either the first start winning means or the second starting prize means, and the game can be advanced as if a win / loss lottery can be received. .. That is, even if the game ball entering the first starting winning means is low, if the game ball enters the second starting winning means relatively easily, the winning / winning lottery can be consistently received. , There is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the game ball has entered the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means, so the first starting gradually. You will not be worried about whether a game ball is easy to enter the winning means. As a result, even if the easiness of entering the game ball into the first start winning means is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression resulting from that.

  In addition, by providing the front covering means, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the peripheral parts of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. In other words, if the player hits the game ball aiming at the front covering means, it is possible to obtain a comparatively easy-to-understand visual image that the player will enter either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. Further, the front covering means for collectively covering the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means can make more dynamic decoration and the like, and can improve the design.

  The front covering means may be formed integrally with a portion that covers the first starting winning means and a portion that covers the second starting winning means (integral molding, or a separate body is integrated). Alternatively, separate components may be arranged adjacent to each other. In addition, "a portion of the front covering means that allows a game ball to pass through at least a game area behind the front covering means (for example, covers the front of the winning means such as the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means). The parts other than the parts) may be transparent (made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, or have slits, etc.) ”. In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which the player or the like who plays the game for the first time becomes uneasy by not seeing what is happening on the back side of the front covering means. Further, for example, the pre-covering means may be used as a place for teaching predetermined information to the player. For example, the front covering means may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning or losing lottery, etc.) or an image character.

Means B-4-a. The pseudo blade opening means is arranged in front of the blade member and can cover a functional position capable of covering the front side of the blade member in the open position and a front side of the blade member in the closed position. Equipped with a pseudo blade member that can be displaced between the standby position,
Means, wherein the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the game area behind the pseudo blade member when the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. The gaming machine according to any one of B-1 to B-3.

  According to the means B-4-a, the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived more realistically. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide pseudo blade opening means that imitates the aspect of the blade member behind the blade member, but in this case, since the pseudo blade opening means is arranged relatively behind, Even if the blade opening means is in the pseudo blade opening mode, it may be difficult to see. In addition, the game ball may pass in front of the pseudo blade opening means in the pseudo blade opening mode. Due to these, there is a possibility that it is instantly recognized that the pseudo blade opening mode is pseudo. In this respect, the provision of the pseudo blade member in front of the blade member can eliminate the above-mentioned concern.

  Further, since the pseudo blade member can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member is kept in the closed position, the opening and closing type start winning means (second starting winning means) causes more game balls than necessary. Without the need to produce a mode in which the pseudo-blade member operates (for example, a mode in which the character operates when the pseudo-vane member is part of the character display, a mode in which the opening-and-closing type start winning means opens (delicately), etc.) It can be fully utilized.

  The shape of the pseudo blade member is not limited to the plate shape. For example, a square frame shape that opens in the displacement direction of the pseudo blade member and can accommodate the blade member inside, or a square frame shape It may be configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section such that a part thereof is cut out. Further, with respect to the means B-2 and the means B-3, the pseudo blade member in the functional position may be projected more outward than the outer edge of the front covering means. That is, while making it difficult to understand the location of the blade member, making the location of the pseudo blade member easy to understand makes people aware of the effect using the pseudo blade member, while paying attention to the opening and closing of the blade member. It is possible to have the game proceed while suppressing the loss.

  Means B-4-b. The game machine according to the means B-4-a, wherein the pseudo blade opening means displaces the pseudo blade member to the functional position when the blade member is displaced to the open position. ..

  According to the means B-4-b, when the blade member is in the open position, the blade member is viewed from the front, and when the blade member is in the closed position, the pseudo blade member is in the pseudo position. It is possible to make it the same as the front view of the blade member (both pseudo blade members in the functional position are visually recognized). Therefore, the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode can be further enhanced. Further, when adopting the configuration, it is not necessary to make the aspect of the front surface of the blade member the same as the aspect of the pseudo blade member, and it is necessary to perform processing such as drawing a graphic on the front surface of the blade member. It doesn't have to be applied. Therefore, the configuration of the blade member can be simplified, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member, the figure or the like rubs against the pseudo blade member, and the design is deteriorated. It is possible to prevent the accident.

  Means B-4-c. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member extend on the same straight line. The gaming machine described in 4-a or B-4-b.

  According to the means B-4-c, the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member can be relatively easily synchronized. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member is being displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member to cover the front of the blade member. Therefore, the function and effect such as making the location of the blade member difficult to understand are further exhibited. It should be noted that the shaft for blades connected to the blade members may be inserted inside the shaft for blades having a substantially cylindrical shape. In this case, the rotation axes of the blade member and the pseudo blade member can be extended on the same straight line relatively easily.

  Means B-4-d. The vane member presses the pseudo vane member when the vane member is displaced from the closed position to the open position to displace the pseudo vane member from the standby position to the functional position. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-4-a to B-4-c, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a section.

  According to the means B-4-d, when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the blade member is driven first (mainly), the pseudo blade member follows it. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the blade members and the pseudo blade member from moving independently, and to move them in synchronization with each other as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the functional position are deviated from each other, and the blade member is displaced to the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is displaced to the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is easy to understand whether or not it is just done.

  When the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the standby position to the functional position, the blade side driving means for operating the blade member and the pseudo blade Of the pseudo side driving means for operating the member, the blade side driving means may be driven.

  Means B-4-e. The pseudo vane member presses the vane member when the pseudo vane member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position to displace the vane member from the open position to the closed position. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-4-a to B-4-d, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a section.

  According to the means B-4-e, when the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, when the pseudo blade member is driven first (mainly), the blade member follows it. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the blade members and the pseudo blade member from moving independently, and to move them in synchronization with each other as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displacing to the closed position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displacing to the standby position are deviated from each other, and the blade member was in the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes easier to understand whether or not it existed in.

  When the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, the blade side driving means for operating the blade member and the pseudo blade Of the pseudo side driving means for operating the member, the pseudo side driving means may be driven.

  Means B-4-f. Means B-4-a, wherein the blade member is made of a material which is colorless and transparent or has a hue similar to the color of a member positioned behind the blade member in the open position. A gaming machine according to any one of B to B-4-e.

  According to the means B-4-f, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the blade member (it becomes difficult to confirm the operation and location of the blade member). Therefore, the operational effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further exhibited.

Means B-4-g. A sub control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Opening and closing control of the opening and closing start winning means is executed by the main control means,
The drive control of the pseudo blade opening means is executed by the sub control means (corresponding to the information regarding the opening / closing of the opening / closing start winning means from the main control means). The gaming machine described in a to B-4-f.

  According to the means B-4-g, the control load of the main control means can be reduced.

B-4-h. The pseudo blade opening means is
When the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member in the standby position is displaced to the functional position,
When the vane member in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo vane member in the functional position is displaced to the functional position,
The main control means, prior to the process of displacing the blade member to the open position, outputs to the sub-control means opening schedule information indicating that the blade member is displaced to the open position,
The sub-control means, when receiving the opening schedule information, displaces the pseudo blade member to the standby position, the gaming machine according to means B-4-g.

  According to the means B-4-h, when the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member is already in the functional position, so that the blade member in the middle of displacement is covered with the pseudo blade member. It is possible to avoid a situation where it becomes impossible.

Means B-4-i. The pseudo blade member is configured to have a larger front surface area than the blade member,
When the vane member is in the open position and the pseudo vane member is in the functional position, the side portion of the pseudo vane member on the standby position side of the surface of the vane member on the closed position side. Is closer to the closed position,
When the vane member is in the closed position and the pseudo vane member is in the standby position, the side portion of the pseudo vane member on the functional position side is more than the surface of the vane member on the open position side. One is located on the side of the open position, the gaming machine according to the means B-4-g or the means B-4-h.

  When the opening / closing control of the blade member and the drive control of the pseudo blade member are performed by different control means, the operation start timing of the blade member and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member may be slightly deviated. In this respect, according to the means B-4-i, the moving direction side of the blade member that can move first is configured to be additionally covered with the pseudo blade member, and it is assumed that the blade member is displaced slightly ahead. Also falls within the range covered by the pseudo blade member. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand whether or not the blade member is displaced, and it is possible to prevent the design property from being deteriorated due to the deviation between the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member. it can.

Means B-4-j. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged below the central portion of the game board,
When at least the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member arranged in front of the blade member is larger than the upper surface of the blade member. The gaming machine according to the means B-4-a to B-4-i, wherein the gaming machine is also configured to be located above.

  Generally, when a player plays a game machine, the player's face has a positional relationship such that the face of the player faces the central portion of the game board. When the blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged below the central portion of the game board, the player's line of sight with respect to the blade member and the pseudo blade member is directed obliquely downward (the blade member and the pseudo blade member are inclined. It looks like you can look into it from above. Therefore, even if the blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged in front and rear, there is a concern that the blade member and the pseudo blade member may be discriminated from each other in an instant.

  On the other hand, according to the means B-4-j, since the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member in the functional position is located above the upper surface of the blade member in the open position, the blade member in the open position and the When the pseudo blade members in the functional position are viewed from the upper front, the pseudo blade members can be relatively arranged so as to overlap each other as much as possible. Therefore, the operational effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further exhibited.

  Means B-4-k. The advancing direction of the game ball moving in the game area at a specific covering area whose front is covered by the pseudo vane member in the functional position in the game area, or at a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the specific covering area. The game machine according to any one of the means B-4-a to B-4-j, characterized in that a course changing means for changing is provided.

  For example, even if the game ball enters the specific covering area and the blade member is at the open position, even if the game ball reaches the guide point guided to the opening / closing start winning means (ball receiving portion) by the blade member, When the blade member is in the closed position, the game ball is naturally guided to the blade member and flows down the game area as it is, and is discharged to the outside of the specific covering area. At this time, if the trajectory of the game sphere entering the specific coverage area and the trajectory after the game sphere is discharged from the specific coverage area extend substantially in a straight line, the gaming sphere that has previously entered the coverage area is a blade member. Without being guided to the player, the player will be immediately grasped as being discharged from the specific covering area without entering the starting winning means.

  In this respect, like the means B-4-k, the course changing means is provided at a position adjacent to or close to the specific coverage area, or on the downstream side thereof, so that the game ball after entering the specific coverage area is provided. Will be hard to follow. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the specific cover area and the game ball that has jumped out of the specific cover area to an easily visible location, and the game ball is guided by the blade member to open and close the start. It is possible to create more situations in which the player may or may not have entered the winning means (second starting winning means).

  It should be noted that "the side portion of the dummy blade member in the functional position on the standby position side is located closer to the closed position side than the surface of the blade member in the open position on the closed position side". " Further, the "game ball guided by the blade member in the open position may be configured to be covered in front by the pseudo blade member in the functional position". In this case, it can be more difficult to understand whether or not the game ball is guided by the blade member.

  It should be noted that, corresponding to the above-mentioned means B-2, "the course changing means may be provided also in the covering region covered by the front covering means". In this case, it becomes more difficult to understand the behavior of the game ball in the covered area, and it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has been discharged from the covered area. Further, corresponding to the means B-2-d, "the course changing means is provided with a pseudo-winning guide means for guiding the game ball moving in the covering area to the pseudo-winning detection means". Good. In this case, it is possible to easily bring the game ball to the pseudo-winning detection means. For example, although the pseudo-winning detection means is provided, it has to be installed at a position where the game ball does not pass so much due to the installation space. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where it hardly functions. Furthermore, the game sphere has a longer time lag from entering the covered area to being discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the starting winning means, and with the game ball entering the covered area, The effect of obscuring the correspondence with the game ball discharged from the covering region is more prominent.

Means B-5-a. The pseudo blade opening means is
A pseudo open object that is provided at a position overlapping with the blade member in the open position in the front-rear direction and imitates the blade member in the open position;
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 or B-4, further comprising: a pseudo light source that irradiates the pseudo open object with light.

  According to the means B-5, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade opening mode while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Incidentally, a pseudo blade member as described in the means B-4 may be used together. Corresponding to the means B-2 and the means B-3, "at least a part of the pre-coating means is configured as a light guide plate, and light is incident from the end on the light guide plate by the dummy light source. By doing so, the pseudo open object is configured to emerge at a position of the light guide plate that covers the front of the blade member at the open position. ” In this case, the pseudo-blade opening mode can be derived in the front covering means, and the visibility of the pseudo-blade opening mode can be improved. Further, in the pre-coating means, the pseudo blade opening mode can be visually recognized only when the pseudo light source emits light.

Means B-5-b. The vane member (in the case where the configuration of the above means B-4 is also used, the “pseudo vane member”) includes a light emitting means visible from the front,
The game machine according to means B-5-a, wherein the pseudo-open object of the pseudo-blade opening means is formed at least imitating the light-emitting means.

  According to the means B-5-b, the wing member (pseudo wing member) has a visual mode in which the wing member itself is emitting light, so that the wing member is in the open position, the pseudo open object, and the pseudo open object. It is possible to more strongly combine with the pseudo blade opening mode by the pseudo blade opening means using a light source for use (confusing which one is confused by a quick intuitive judgment). It is also possible to simplify the configuration (shape) of the pseudo-opening object of the pseudo-blade opening means (it becomes a sufficiently pseudo mode by imitating only the light emitting means, not the whole).

Means B-5-c. The pseudo-open object not only overlaps the front and rear of the blade member in the open position, but also overlaps the front and rear of the blade member in the closed position and the front and rear of the blade member in the open position. It is also provided in the position between the overlapping position,
The gaming machine according to the means B-5-a or B-5-b, wherein the pseudo light source is configured to sequentially emit light to each of the pseudo open objects.

  According to the means B-5-c, it is possible to derive a mode simulating that the blade member opens and closes. Therefore, it is possible to derive more realistic and various pseudo blade opening modes.

Means B-6. An opening covering means for covering the front of the blade member in the open position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, comprising at least one of a closing time covering means for covering the front of the blade member in the closed position.

  According to the means B-6, since the blade member in the closed position or the open position is hidden, it is difficult to know whether the blade member is in the open position or the closed position. In particular, with regard to the above-mentioned means B-4, when the position of the blade member and the position of the pseudo blade member do not correspond to each other, the action and effect of this means will be further exerted. Incidentally, like the above-mentioned means B-4-k, in the game area, the area covered in front by the disclosed covering means, or a portion adjacent to the downstream side of the area, the progress of the game ball moving in the game area. A course changing means for changing the direction may be provided. That is, for example, even in the configuration in which the pseudo blade member is not provided like the means B-4-k, the course is changed in the means B-6 which makes it difficult to know whether or not the blade member is in the open position. By providing the means, basically the same operational effect as that of the means B-4-k is obtained.

  C. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting winning means provided on the game board, a win / loss lottery is performed to determine whether or not the hit state is generated, and a win / loss lottery is performed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

  Also, as a starting winning means, an opening and closing type starting winning means is provided which allows the gaming ball to be entered only when a predetermined open lottery is won, and the starting winning means is filled with the gaming ball. It is known to add intonation to the game by setting a state in which it is easy to play and a state in which it is difficult to enter. However, even the opening-and-closing type starting winning means only opens and closes according to the result of the open lottery, and the behavior of itself is monotonous. Furthermore, the game ball that has reached the opening / closing start winning means can be entered if the opening / closing start winning means is in the open state, and cannot be entered if the opening / closing start winning means is in the closed state. The behavior of the game ball moving around the means is relatively monotonous.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance of a starting winning and further enhancing the interest. ..

Means C-1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
Starting winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
Starting prize detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the starting winning means,
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a main control means for performing a win / win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the win / win lottery. A gaming machine comprising and
The game area is provided so as to be separated from the game board by a distance through which the game balls can pass, and the starting winning means (entrance) or the guiding means for guiding the gaming balls to the starting winning means ( Is arranged to be displaceable between a functional position that covers the front of the game ball) and a standby position that exposes the starting winning means or the guiding means to the front, and at least a part of the transparency is provided. A gaming machine provided with a movable coating means having.

  According to the means C-1, when the movable covering means is in the functional position, whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means, although the movable covering means has a see-through property, or The visibility is relatively lowered as to whether or not the ball is guided by the guide means. In particular, when the movable covering means is in operation or immediately after the operation, the player's line of sight is directed toward the movable covering means, and this tendency becomes stronger. Therefore, it is conceivable that a situation may occur in which the player loses sight of the game ball for a moment even if he or she is following it, or it becomes easier for the player to grasp the trend of the game ball by another method. It is possible to get the opportunity to add (where the game ball moves, and as a result, the effect of teaching and suggesting what will happen, etc. is performed on another display means). As a result, it is possible to generate more dramatic developments and effects regarding the entry of the game ball into the starting prize means (starting prize), and it is possible to improve the interest.

  The movable covering means of the means C-1 is constituted by, for example, the pseudo blade member 431 in the above-described main embodiment, and the general portion is constituted by the front decoration portion 403.

  Means C-2. The advancing direction of the game ball moving in the game area at a specific covering area whose front is covered by the movable covering means in the functional position in the game area, or at a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the specific covering area. The game machine according to the means C-1 characterized in that a course changing means for changing the is provided.

  For example, even if a game ball enters a specific covering area whose front is covered by the movable covering means in the functional position, the game ball enters the starting winning means provided in the specific covering area or is guided by the guiding means. If not, the game ball naturally flows down the game area and is discharged to the outside of the specific covering area. At this time, if the trajectory of the game sphere entering the specific coverage area and the trajectory after the game sphere is discharged from the specific coverage area extend in a substantially straight line, the gaming sphere that has just entered the coverage area is a starting prize. It is immediately grasped (specified) as being discharged from the specific covering area without entering the means.

  In this regard, like the means C-2, the course of the game sphere after entering the specific coverage area is provided by providing a course changing means at a specific coverage area, or at a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side thereof. Hard to follow. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the game ball that has entered the specific cover area and the game ball that has jumped out of the specific cover area to an easily visible location, and the game ball enters the starting winning means, You can create more situations where you may have been guided by the guidance means or you may not have been guided. Accordingly, by providing the movable covering means, even if it is difficult to know whether or not the game ball has won the starting prize, it is possible to prevent the situation where the player directly grasps whether the game ball has won the starting prize or the like. It is possible to make the effect more effective when performing an effect that teaches or suggests what happened to the game ball that has entered the specific covered area.

Means C-3-a. In the game area, provided with a distance that allows game balls to pass between the game board and the game board, at least a front covering means for covering the front of the starting winning means,
The front covering means is provided (in front view) adjacent to or in proximity to the movable covering means (provided so as not to be displaceable relative to the game board), and at least partially transparent. It has a general part that
The gaming machine according to means C-2, wherein the route changing means is provided for a general covering area of the gaming area, the front of which is covered by the general part.

  According to the means C-3-a, it becomes more difficult to understand the behavior of the game sphere in the covering area (general covering area and specific covering area) behind the front covering means, and from the gaming sphere that has entered the covering area and the covering area. It is possible to make the correspondence with the discharged game balls difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which the game balls that have entered the covered area may have entered the starting winning means or may not have entered. It should be noted that "the front covering means may be attached to the game board".

  Means C-3-b. The gaming machine according to the means C-3-a, wherein the front covering means is configured to cover the front of at least a part of the movable covering means.

  According to the means C-3-b, the front covering means and the movable covering means can be combined in a more complicated manner to derive more diverse effects. Also, hiding the link mechanism portion of the movable covering means, hiding the movable covering means in a predetermined state (position), supporting the movable covering means, or guiding the displacement of the movable covering means. You can

Means C-4-a. In the covered area (general covered area) of the game area where the front is covered by the front covering means, a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
The gaming machine according to means C-3, which is configured to be capable of deriving a pseudo winning mode as if the start winning detection means detected based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means.

  According to the means C-4-a, the pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the starting winning means in the covering region where the front is covered by the front covering means. That is, by providing the pre-covering means, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means is relatively lowered, the pre-covering means is detected based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means. Derivation of a pseudo-winning mode in which a game ball that has entered the cover area on the back side may have entered the starting winning means (for example, in the detection of a pseudo-winning detection means installed in the covering area like the starting winning means) Based on this, the same reaction as when the start winning detection means is detected is derived, and if derived, the reaction is suggested by the detection of the start winning detection means, etc.) You can Therefore, as the action of the game ball for the starting winning means, it is possible to add the pattern of "may be entered" in addition to "entered" and "not entered". It is possible to increase the types of effects and diversify the effects. As a result, it is difficult to understand whether or not the game ball enters the starting winning means by providing the front covering means (dramatically increasing the value of the game ball entering the starting winning means). It is possible to improve interests.

  Further, corresponding to the means C-3, "the course changing means includes a pseudo-winning guide means for guiding a game ball moving in the covering area (general covering area) to the pseudo-winning detecting means. It is also possible to say. In this case, it is possible to easily bring the game ball to the pseudo-winning detection means. For example, although the pseudo-winning detection means is provided, it has to be installed at a position where the game ball does not pass so much due to the installation space. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where it hardly functions. Furthermore, the game sphere has a longer time lag from entering the covered area to being discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the starting winning means, and with the game ball entering the covered area, The effect of obscuring the correspondence with the game ball discharged from the covering region is more prominent.

Means C-4-b. When the start winning detection means is detected, a ball detection correspondence display means capable of deriving a ball detection detection display (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection is provided.
When the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is performed, the pseudo-detection-correspondence display in a mode different from that of the entrance-detection-correspondence display imitating the entrance-detection-correspondence display in the entrance-detection-correspondence display ( The game machine according to C-4-a, wherein the pseudo holding icon) is derivable.

  According to the means C-4-b, even if the start winning means is not directly visually recognized, the game ball is entered into the starting winning means by visually recognizing the entry detection corresponding display means, and the right to win or lose the lottery. It is possible to understand (rather easy to understand) that is obtained. Therefore, even if it is difficult to see how the game balls enter the start winning detection means, it is possible to firmly confirm whether or not the game has been entered by the entry detection corresponding display means. Can give a sense of security to the person.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the entry detection correspondence display is displayed when the game ball enters the starting winning means, the movable covering means makes it difficult to see how the game ball enters the starting winning means. Also, at the time when the ball entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is immediately understood that the game ball has not entered the starting winning means. In this respect, by making it possible to display the pseudo ball detection detection display, even at the timing when the ball detection detection display is displayed, the result of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means can be understood. It can be extended, and it is possible to perform an effect such as whether it is a display corresponding to the entrance detection or a display corresponding to the pseudo entrance detection. Therefore, the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means can be made even more interesting.

  Incidentally, in the state where the pseudo-winning-ball detection corresponding display is displayed, in the case where the start winning detection means is detected, instead of the pseudo-winning-ball detection corresponding display, the above-mentioned entry-ball detecting correspondence display is displayed. It must be configured to be derivable ”. In this case, the visual recognition mode of the area in which the entrance detection correspondence display and the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display are displayed can be relatively neat. In addition, it is also possible to say that "the pseudo-ball entry detection correspondence display is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed since being displayed". That is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo entry detection correspondence display is displayed forever and the role of the pseudo entry detection correspondence display becomes difficult to understand.

  Means C-4-c. When the start winning detection means is detected, before deriving a ball detection detection corresponding display (main hold icon) corresponding to the detection, the same as the pseudo ball detection detection display (pseudo hold icon) The gaming machine according to the means C-4-b, which is configured to be able to derive a precursor display (temporary hold icon) which is an aspect.

  According to the means C-4-c, at the stage where the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display or the precursor display is displayed, while ensuring the enjoyment of whether or not this changes to the entrance detection correspondence display, the entrance detection correspondence display is obtained. It is possible to clarify the difference in the form from the display corresponding to the pseudo ball detection (it is easy to understand that the display corresponding to the pseudo ball detection is not the display corresponding to the ball detection). In other words, if you look closely at the display corresponding to the entrance detection and the display corresponding to the pseudo entrance detection, in the case where the display is similar or indistinguishable, the player does not It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is convinced that the display corresponding to the ball detection is a display corresponding to the ball detection, and causes a sense of distrust.

  Means C-4-d. A detection history storage unit is provided which can store the detection history of the start winning detection unit (the time of each detection) and the detection history of the pseudo prize detection unit (the time of each detection), and the storage of the detection history storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-4-a to C-4-c, which is configured to output information.

  According to the means C-4-d, by recognizing the pseudo winning mode, the player misunderstands that a game ball has entered the starting winning means (for example, the player detects a pseudo winning). In the unlikely event that trouble occurs due to misunderstanding the correspondence display as the entry detection correspondence display, data for explaining the situation etc. can be surely obtained (for example, variable display means can be used for display, hall computer) Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation where the above trouble is troubled.

Means C-4-e. A sub control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
The game machine according to any one of the means C-4-a to C-4-d, wherein the pseudo winning detection means is electrically connected to the sub-control means.

  According to the means C-4-e, by reducing the information input to the main control means and the number of components for inputting information to the main control means as much as possible, the control load of the main control means is reduced, and It is possible to prevent fraud in the control means.

Means C-4-f. There is a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is valid as a trigger of the winning / winning lottery, and an invalid state,
In the state where the detection by the starting winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means corresponding to the movable covering means (the front portion is covered by the front covering means) is effective, the pseudo winning The detection of the detection means is enabled,
The detection by the pseudo winning award detection unit is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start-up award detection unit is invalid, according to any one of the means C-4-a to C-4-e. Amusement machine.

  According to the means C-4-f, the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is displayed in the state where the entrance detection correspondence display is not supposed to be displayed, so that the display is clearly the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interest is deteriorated due to the fact that the display corresponding to the false pseudo-ball detection is unnecessarily derived.

Means C-5. A winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the starting winning detection means,
And a sound effect generating means capable of generating a confusion winning effect sound close to the winning effect sound,
The sound effect generating means,
Generates the winning effect sound or the confusion winning effect sound based on the detection of the starting winning detection means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-1 to C-4, which generates the confusion winning effect sound based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means.

  According to the means C-5, even if the starting winning means is not directly visually recognized, it is possible to confirm the entry of the game ball into the starting winning means by the sound effect, and the game can be progressed more smoothly. it can. Also, the confusion winning effect sound is generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, and the confusion winning effect sound is generated based on the detection of the starting winning detection means, so that the game ball enters the starting winning means. The production that may be possible can be made more realistic.

Means C-6-a. The guide means is an opening-and-closing-type start-up prize that is configured to be capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter. Opening position provided corresponding to the opening and closing start winning means, and guiding the game ball moving to the side of the opening and closing starting winning means to the opening and closing starting winning means, and the opening and closing starting winning means The opening and closing start winning means is placed in the open state and the closed state by displacing between the closed position that restricts the movement of the game ball moving to the side of the opening and closing start winning means. It is configured as a changing blade member,
The movable covering means is configured to cover the front of the blade member in the open position by being in the functional position. The game machine described.

  According to the means C-6-a, it is possible to make it difficult to understand by the movable covering means whether or not the blade member of the opening / closing start winning means is in the open position. It should be noted that "a side portion of the movable covering means in the functional position on the standby position side is located closer to the closed position than a surface of the blade member in the open position on the closed position side". " Further, the "game ball guided by the blade member in the open position may be configured to be covered in front by the movable covering means in the functional position". In this case, it can be more difficult to understand whether or not the game ball is guided by the blade member.

  Corresponding to the means C-3, "the front covering means (general section) includes a first object display section that models a first object, and the movable covering means models a second object. A second object display section that is provided, and when the movable covering means is in the functional position, the second object is in a completed display state in which the third object is combined with the first object, and the movable covering means is By setting the standby position, the whole or most of the second object is in an unfinished display state in which it is hidden behind the first object. ”

  In this case, the first object display section is provided for the front covering means (general section), and the third object is modeled together with the first object when the movable covering means is in the functional position. By providing a second object display section for displaying, the line of sight is focused on the third object or the like that moves along with the displacement of the movable covering means, while the visibility on the back side of the front covering means is reduced and the starting winning means is provided. It is possible to reduce the player's interest in how the game ball enters the. Therefore, the operational effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to the decrease in the ease of entering the game ball into any of the starting winning means is further exhibited.

  D. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting winning means provided on the game board, a win / loss lottery is performed to determine whether or not the hit state is generated, and a win / loss lottery is performed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

  Further, in recent years, before the variable display is executed, an effect that suggests the content of the variable display (so-called prefetch effect, hold effect) may be performed. However, such suggestive production is also made into a rut, and the effect of improving the interest is decreasing.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further increasing interest in starting winning.

Means D-1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
Starting winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
Starting prize detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the starting winning means,
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a main control means for performing a win / win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the win / win lottery. A gaming machine comprising and
In the game area, provided with a distance that allows game balls to pass between the game board and the game board, at least a front covering means for covering the front of the starting winning means,
In the covered area of the game area, the front of which is covered by the front covering means, is provided with a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area.
A game machine characterized in that it can be configured to derive a pseudo prize mode as if the start prize detecting means detected based on the detection of the pseudo prize detecting means.

  According to the means D-1, in the covering region where the front is covered by the front covering means, the pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the starting winning means. That is, by providing the pre-covering means, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means is relatively lowered, the pre-covering means is detected based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means. Derivation of a pseudo-winning mode in which a game ball that has entered the cover area on the back side may have entered the starting winning means (for example, in the detection of a pseudo-winning detection means installed in the covering area like the starting winning means) Based on this, the same reaction as when the start winning detection means is detected is derived, and if derived, the reaction is suggested by the detection of the start winning detection means, etc.) You can Therefore, as the action of the game ball for the starting winning means, it is possible to add the pattern of "may be entered" in addition to "entered" and "not entered". It is possible to increase the types of effects and diversify the effects. As a result, it is difficult to understand whether or not the game ball enters the starting winning means by providing the front covering means (dramatically increasing the value of the game ball entering the starting winning means). It is possible to improve interests.

  The number of starting winning means may be one or plural. In addition, the "pre-covering means may be attached to the game board". In addition, examples of the pseudo winning mode include a display mode on a predetermined display unit, a voice mode by a voice output unit, a light emission mode by a predetermined light emitting unit, and a combination thereof.

Means D-2. When the start winning detection unit is detected, a ball detection correspondence display unit capable of deriving a ball detection detection display corresponding to the detection is provided.
When the detection of the pseudo-winning detection means is performed, the display for detecting the correspondence to the entrance, which corresponds to the display for detecting the entrance-detection, displays a display corresponding to the entrance-detection-corresponding display which is different from the above-mentioned display for the corresponding entrance-detection. The gaming machine according to D-1, which is configured to be derivable.

  In the configuration in which the entry detection correspondence display is displayed when the game ball enters the starting winning means, even if the state of entering the starting ball into the starting winning means of the game ball is made difficult to see by the front covering means, At the time when the entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is immediately understood that the game ball has not entered the starting winning means. In this respect, by making it possible to display the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display as in the means D-2, whether the game ball has entered the starting winning means even at the timing when the entrance detection correspondence display is displayed. It is possible to extend the understanding of the result of whether or not the result is obtained, and it is possible to perform an effect such as whether it is a display corresponding to the entrance detection or a display corresponding to the pseudo entrance detection. Therefore, the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means can be made even more interesting. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of the effect as to whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning means, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Means D-3. When the start winning detection means is detected, it is possible to derive a precursor display, which is the same mode as the pseudo-ball detection detection display, before deriving a ball detection detection display corresponding to the detection. The gaming machine described in Means D-2, which is characterized in that

  According to the means D-3, at the stage when the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display or the precursor display is displayed, while ensuring the enjoyment of whether or not this changes to the entrance detection correspondence display, the entrance detection correspondence display, It is possible to clarify the difference in the aspect from the display corresponding to the pseudo ball detection (it is easy to understand that the display corresponding to the pseudo ball detection is not the display corresponding to the ball detection). In other words, if you look closely at the display corresponding to the entrance detection and the display corresponding to the pseudo entrance detection, in the case where the display is similar or indistinguishable, the player does not It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is convinced that the display corresponding to the ball detection is a display corresponding to the ball detection, and causes a sense of distrust.

Means D-4. A variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information,
In the variable display means, the identification information is variably displayed, and after a predetermined time, with display control means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the win / loss lot,
An information acquisition unit for acquiring information used in the winning / winning lottery when the start winning detection unit is detected,
The information acquired by the information acquisition unit, a plurality of holding storage unit capable of storing a predetermined number as an upper limit,
When the start winning detection means is detected during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is the variable display of the identification information being executed. It will be done later,
Means D- characterized in that the mode of the entrance detection correspondence display of the entrance detection correspondence display means is determined based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the hold storage means. The gaming machine described in 3.

  According to the means D-4, it is possible to perform a variety of effects using the display corresponding to the entrance detection and the display corresponding to the pseudo entrance detection. For example, if a predetermined type of pseudo-ball-detection-corresponding display is derived based on the detection by the start winning detection means, and if this is changed to a ball-detection detection-corresponding display, the expectation of occurrence of a special game state It is possible to perform suggestive effects such as increasing the degree. Incidentally, "when the number of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the holding storage means has reached the upper limit, the pseudo-winning-ball-detecting means detects the pseudo-winning-balls It is also possible not to derive the detection correspondence display ”.

  Means D-5. When the pseudo-ball-on-detection correspondence display is displayed, an additional display different from the pseudo-ball-on-detection correspondence display is displayed so as to overlap at least part of the front of the pseudo-ball-on-detection correspondence display. The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-2 to D-4.

  According to the means D-5, by setting the mode of the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display to a mode in which at least a part thereof is not made clear, the mode of the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is not fixed, and by extension, the pseudo appearance. It is possible to strongly give the impression that there is a possibility of further change in the display corresponding to the entrance detection. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player confuses the pseudo-ball-on-detection corresponding display with the ball-on-detection corresponding display, and misunderstands the pseudo-ball-on-detection corresponding display as the ball-on-detection corresponding display. Trouble that can occur in (for example, only the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is performed, but by misunderstanding this as the entrance detection correspondence display, processing that can be executed when the entrance detection correspondence display is performed It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as not being executed. It should be noted that “when the additional display is also derived to the precursor display”, “instead of the precursor display, when the entrance detection correspondence display is derived, it corresponds to the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display. The additional display that has been displayed as "is erased".

  Means D-6. The detection history of the start winning detection means (each detection time) and the detection history of the pseudo winning detection means (each detection time) are provided respectively, and the storage information of the detection history storage means is stored. The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-5, which is configured to be capable of outputting.

  According to the means D-6, by recognizing the pseudo winning mode, the player misunderstands that the game ball has entered the starting winning means (for example, the player displays the pseudo-ball detection detection correspondence). In the unlikely event that a trouble occurs due to misunderstanding that it is a ball entry detection compatible display, etc., the data for explaining the situation etc. can be surely obtained (for example, it can be displayed on the variable display means or sent to the hall computer). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation where the above trouble is troubled.

Means D-7. A sub control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-6, wherein the pseudo winning detection means is electrically connected to the sub-control means.

  According to the means D-7, the information input to the main control means and the number of components for inputting the information to the main control means are reduced as much as possible to reduce the control load of the main control means and the main control means. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

  Means D-8. A path changing means for changing the advancing direction of the game ball is provided in a covered area of the game area where the front is covered by the front covering means, or in a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the covered area. The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-7.

  For example, even if a game ball enters the covered area, if it cannot enter the starting winning means, it flows down the game area and is discharged to the outside of the covered area. At this time, if the trajectory of the game sphere incident on the covered area and the trajectory after the game sphere is discharged from the covered area extend on a substantially straight line, the game sphere incident on the covered area is the first start prize. It is immediately grasped as being discharged from the covered area without entering the means and the second starting winning means.

  In this respect, since the course changing means is provided in the covering area like the means D-8, the advancing direction of the game ball changes in the covering area and the advancing speed of the gaming ball is delayed. It becomes difficult to follow the whereabouts of the game ball after entering the area. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the covered area to an easily visible location, and it may be that the game ball has entered the starting winning means. , It is possible to create more situations that may not have entered the ball.

  Means D-9. The gaming machine according to means D-8, characterized in that the route changing means includes a pseudo-winning guide means for guiding a game ball moving in the covered area to the pseudo-winning detection means.

  According to the means D-9, it is possible to easily bring the game ball to the pseudo-winning detection means. For example, although the pseudo-winning detection means is provided, due to the installation space or the like, the game ball does not pass so much. It is possible to avoid a situation where it has to be installed and it hardly functions. Furthermore, the game sphere has a longer time lag from entering the covered area to being discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the starting winning means, and with the game ball entering the covered area, The effect of obscuring the correspondence with the game ball discharged from the covering region is more prominent.

Means D-10. There is a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is valid as a trigger of the winning / winning lottery, and an invalid state,
In the state where the detection by the starting winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means whose front is covered by the front covering means is valid, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is enabled,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-9, wherein the detection by the pseudo winning detection means is disabled in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is disabled.

  According to the means D-10, the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display is displayed in a state where the entrance detection correspondence display should not be displayed, so that it is clearly recognized as the pseudo entrance detection correspondence display. It is possible to avoid such a situation as to end up. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interest is deteriorated due to the fact that the display corresponding to the false pseudo-ball detection is unnecessarily derived.

Means E-1. In the gaming machine according to any one of the means A to D,
A payout means (payout device 358) for paying out game balls,
A ball saucer (upper plate 19 or lower plate 15) that can store game balls at a position where the player can contact them,
A dispensing passage for communicating between the dispensing means and the ball tray,
The payout passage is
A first passage extending meandering in the left-right direction (or the front-back direction),
A second passage provided so as to connect between a first position of the first passage and a second position of the first passage on the downstream side of the first position;
Between a first guide state in which a game ball is guided to the first passage and a second guide state in which a game ball is guided to the second passage, which is provided in a connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage. With a payout time adjusting means including a switching means that can be switched by
More than the first time required when the game balls paid out by the payout means are paid out to the ball saucer via the first passage,
A game machine characterized in that a second time required when the game balls paid out by the payout means are paid out to the ball tray via the second passage is set shorter.

  According to the means E-1, it is possible to change the timing at which the game balls are paid out from the payout means to the ball tray. Therefore, whether or not the game ball that has entered the covering area on the back side of the front covering means has entered the starting winning means, depending on whether or not the game ball is paid out to the ball saucer (prize ball) (for example, a pseudo winning ball). It is possible to suppress a situation in which the detection correspondence display is grasped (before being taught whether or not the detection detection correspondence display is provided). Further, it is possible to perform an effect by adjusting the payout timing of the game balls. For example, the payout passage can be switched to the second passage side based on a predetermined operation by the player, and the game balls can be paid out to the ball tray at a timing earlier than usual. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability and playability, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  The time required when the game balls paid out by the payout means are paid out to the ball receiving tray via the payout passage changes depending on the distance, angle, shape (course), etc. of the payout passage.

Means E-2. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player (production button 125, cross button 126, etc.),
The gaming machine according to means E-1, wherein the switching means is switched from the first guidance state to the second guidance state based on an operation of the operation means.

Means E-3. A variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information,
In the variable display means, the identification information is variably displayed, and after a predetermined time, with display control means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the win / loss lot,
An information acquisition unit that acquires information used in the winning / winning lottery when the first start winning detection unit and the second starting winning detection unit are detected.
The information acquired by the information acquisition unit, a plurality of holding storage unit capable of storing a predetermined number as an upper limit,
When the first start prize detection means and the second start prize detection means are detected during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means, the change display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is performed. A configuration that is performed after the variable display of the identification information being executed,
The means E-1 or E-2 characterized in that the switching means is maintained in the first guidance state in a state where the information obtained by the information obtaining means is not stored in the holding storage means. Game machine.

  According to the means E-3, it is possible to prevent the situation where the player stops the game and leaves the seat before the game ball is paid out to the ball tray.

  The basic configuration of various game machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  a. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed example, "operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, launching means (launching motor, etc.) for playing and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launching There is a "ball game machine" provided with a game area in which the game balls are guided and each of the ball entering means (general winning opening, variable winning device, actuating opening, etc.) arranged in the playing area.

  b. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball-and-ball game machine having a game area extending substantially vertically. As a more detailed example, "operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, launching means (launching motor, etc.) for playing and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launching The game balls are guided, and a predetermined game area (eg, the game area is constituted by a game board surface) extending substantially in the vertical direction, and each ball means (general winning hole, which is arranged in the game area). Variable winning device, actuating port, etc.), and the behavior of a game ball flowing down in the game area can be visually recognized.

  c. The game machine or the ball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a game machine similar to a pachinko machine.

  10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning device, 33b ... 2nd starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decorative symbol display device, 43L ... 1st special display device, 43R ... 2 Special display device, 261, ... Main control device, 262 ... Sub control device.

Claims (2)

A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game balls launched by the launching means are guided,
Starting winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area,
Starting prize detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the starting winning means,
Based on the detection of the start winning detection means, a main control means for performing a win / win lottery for whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the win / win lottery. When,
A gaming machine comprising: a sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
The starting winning means includes a ball entrance for guiding a game ball moving in the game area to the outside of the game area, and an open position for guiding a game ball moving in the game area to the ball entrance , A first variable member that is displaceable substantially parallel to the game board between a closed position that restricts entry of a game ball moving in the game area into the entry port ;
A first position that can cover the front of the first variable member in the open position and a second position that can cover the front of the first variable member in the closed position; 2 variable members,
The first variable member is drive-controlled by the main control means,
The second variable member is drive-controlled by the sub-control unit,
In the case where the first variable member is in the open position and the second variable member is in the first position, the second variable member of the first variable member is closer to the closed position side than the surface of the second variable member. The side portion on the second position side is located on the closed position side ,
The front of the first variable member that is displaced from the closed position to the open position is covered by the second variable member that is displaced from the second position to the first position,
The front of the first variable member that is displaced from the open position to the closed position is covered by the second variable member that is displaced from the first position to the second position,
The first variable member presses the second variable member at the second position when the first variable member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and the second variable member is moved to the second variable member. Equipped with a pressing part that can be displaced to one position,
The second variable member includes a convex pressed portion that is pressed by the pressing portion when the first variable member is displaced from the closed position to the open position,
The pressing portion is configured to avoid interference with the second variable member when displacing the second variable member to the first position while keeping the first variable member in the closed position. gaming machine characterized in that it is.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images